2011 SENTRA OWNER'S MANUAL

®

2011 SENTRAOWNER’S MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2011 N

ISS

AN

SE

NTR

AB

16

-D

Printing : July 2010

Publication No.: OM1E 0B16U2

Printed in U.S.A. B16-D

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSANowners. This vehicle is delivered to you withconfidence. It was produced using the latesttechniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-stand the operation and maintenance of yourvehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through thismanual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Bookletexplains details about the warranties cov-ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Serviceand Maintenance Guide” explains detailsabout maintaining and servicing your ve-hicle. Additionally, a separate CustomerCare/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) willexplain how to resolve any concerns youmay have with your vehicle, as well asclarify your rights under your state’s lemonlaw.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehiclebest. When you require any service or have anyquestions, they will be glad to assist you with theextensive resources available to them.

Before driving your vehicle, please read thisOwner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-iarity with controls and maintenance require-ments, assisting you in the safe operation of yourvehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and comfortable tripfor you and your passengers!

● NEVER drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs.

● ALWAYS observe posted speed limitsand never drive too fast for conditions.

● ALWAYS give your full attention to drivingand avoid using vehicle features or takingother actions that could distract you.

● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-priate child restraint systems. Preteenchildren should be seated in the rear seat.

● ALWAYS provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety features toall occupants of the vehicle.

● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manualfor important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.Modification could affect itsperformance, safety or durability, andmay even violate governmentalregulations. In addition, damage or per-formance problems resulting from modi-fications may not be covered underNISSAN warranties.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

This manual includes information for all optionsavailable on this model. Therefore, you may findsome information that does not apply to yourvehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations inthis manual are those in effect at the time ofprinting. NISSAN reserves the right to changespecifications or design without notice and with-out obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual. Theyare used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or seriouspersonal injury. To avoid or reduce therisk, the procedures must be followedprecisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause minor or moder-ate personal injury or damage to your ve-hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-tion, it means the arrow points to the front of thevehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to theseindicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to thesecall attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components containor emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth de-fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component wearcontain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATEADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-ies, may contain perchlorate material. Thefollowing advisory is provided: “PerchlorateMaterial – special handling may apply, Seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

BLUETOOTH� is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.,U.S.A. and licensedto Visteon.

XM Radio� requiressubscription, soldseparately. Notavailable in Alaska,Hawaii or Guam.For moreinformation, visitwww.xmradio.com.

© Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted in any form, or by anymeans, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,recording or otherwise, without the prior writtenpermission of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer areour primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSANdealer cannot assist you with or you would like toprovide NISSAN directly with comments orquestions, please contact the NISSAN Con-sumer Affairs Department using our toll-freenumber:

For U.S. customers1-800-NISSAN-1(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for thefollowing information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to thetop of the instrument panel on the driver’sside)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customersNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

For U.S. [email protected]

For Canadian [email protected]

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10

1. Top tether anchor (P. 1-26)2. Rear head restraint (P. 1-5)3. Rear seat belts (P. 1-11)4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-41)5. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-41)6. Front-seat Active Head

Restraint (P. 1-10)7. Front seat belts (P. 1-11)8. Supplemental front-impact air

bags (P. 1-41)9. Seats (P. 1-2)

10. Occupant classification sensor(pressure sensor) (P. 1-41)

11. Seat belt with pretensioner (P. 1-54)12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-24)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0088

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Engine hood (P. 3-23)2. Windshield wiper and washer

switch (P. 2-20)3. Windshield (P. 8-20)4. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-37)5. Power windows (if so

equipped) (P. 2-34)6. Door locks, keyfob (if so equipped),

NISSAN Intelligent Key ™(if so equipped), keys(P. 3-4, 3-7, 3-11, 3-2)

7. Mirrors (P. 3-28)8. Tire pressure (P. 8-31)9. Flat tire (P. 6-2)10. Tire chains (P. 8-38)11. Headlight and turn signal

switch (P. 2-21)12. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)13. Fog light switch (if so

equipped) (P. 2-21)14. Tie down hook (if so

equipped) (P. 6-14)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0089

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Trunk lid (P. 3-23 )2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)3. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-24)4. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-21)5. Child safety locks (P. 3-7)6. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-25)7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel

recommendation (P. 3-25, P. 9-3)8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)9. Rear tie down hook

(if so equipped) (P. 6-14)10. Exterior trunk lid release/request button

(P. 3-17, 3-24)11. RearView monitor

(if so equipped) (P. 4-8)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0176

EXTERIOR REAR


1. Rear seat (P. 1-3)2. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-37)3. Interior lights, illuminated entry,

moonroof switch (if so equipped)(P. 2-39, P. 2-21, P. 2-37)

4. Sun visors (P. 3-27)5. Rearview mirror (P. 3-28)6. Glove box (P. 2-31)7. Cup holders (P. 2-30)8. Parking brake, parking on hills

(P. 5-19, P. 5-22)9. Front seat (P. 1-2)10. Front console (P. 2-31)11. Rear armrest, cup holders

(if so equipped) (P. 1-7, P 2-30)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0091

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT


1. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn signal switch (P. 2-21); Manualshift paddles (if so equipped) (P. 5-14)

2. Steering wheel switch for audio controland Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem (if so equipped) (P. 4-61, 4-63)

3. Driver’s supplemental air bag/Horn(P. 1-41, 2-25)

4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)5. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-23)6. Cruise control main/set switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-19)

7. Windshield wiper/washer switch(P. 2-20)

8. Storage bin (if so equipped) (P. 2-27)9. Audio system (P. 4-32, 4-35, 4-39)10. Center ventilator (P. 4-14)11. Passenger’s supplemental air bag

(P. 1-41)12. Side ventilator (P. 4-14)13. Storage bin (if so equipped) (P. 2-28)14. Engine oil pressure gauge

(if so equipped) (P. 2-7)15. g (gravity)-force gauge (if so equipped)

(P. 2-5)16. Hazard warning flasher switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-24)17. Hazard warning flasher switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-24); Manual shiftmode switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-14)

18. Navigation system* (if so equipped)(P. 4-45)

19. Glove box (P. 2-31)20. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-41)21. Climate control (P. 4-14)22. Shift selector (P. 5-12)23. Power outlet (P. 2-26)24. Ignition switch (P. 5-7)

WIC1600

INSTRUMENT PANEL


25. Tilt steering (P. 3-27)26. Storage bin (P. 2-28)27. Hood release lever (P. 3-23)28 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-16)* Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.


MR20DE engine

1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-14)4. Battery (P. 8-15)5. Air cleaner (P. 8-19)6. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-22)7. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10)9. Drive belt location (P. 8-17)10. Windshield-washer fluid

reservoir (P. 8-15)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LDI0709

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS


QR25DE engine

1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-14)4. Battery (P. 8-15)5. Air cleaner (P. 8-19)6. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-22)7. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10)9. Drive belt location (P. 8-17)10. Windshield-washer fluid

reservoir (P. 8-15)*Engine cover removed for clarity.


WDI0637


Warninglight

Name Page

or

Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS) warn-ing light

2-10

or

Brake warning light 2-10

Charge warning light 2-11

Door open warninglight

2-11

Electric powersteering warninglight

2-11

Engine oil pressurewarning light

2-11

Warninglight

Name Page

Low fuel warninglight

2-12

Low tire pressurewarning light (if soequipped)

2-12

Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight (if so equipped)

2-13

NISSAN IntelligentKey™ warning light(if so equipped)

2-13

P position selectingwarning light (CVTmodels) (if soequipped)

2-13

Seat belt warninglight and chime

2-13

Supplemental airbag warning light

2-14

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Continuously Vari-able Transmission(CVT) position indi-cator light (CVTmodels)

2-14

Cruise main switchindicator light (if soequipped)

2-14

Cruise set switchindicator light (if soequipped)

2-14

or

Front passenger airbag status light

2-14

High beam indicatorlight (blue)

2-14

Malfunction Indica-tor Light (MIL)

2-15

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS


Indicatorlight

Name Page

Overdrive off indica-tor light (CVT mod-els)

2-15

Security indicatorlight

2-15

Side light and head-light indicator light(green)

2-16

Slip indicator light (ifso equipped)

2-16

Turn signal/hazardindicator lights

2-16

Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) OFFindicator light (if soequipped)

2-16


MEMO


1 Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Rear folding seat system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 1-3Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Rear-facing child restraint installation usingLATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26Rear-facing child restraint installation usingthe seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28Forward-facing child restraint installationusing LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31Forward-facing child restraint installationusing the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33Installing top tether strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37

Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56

WARNING

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat properly. See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” later in thissection.

● After adjustment, gently rock in the seatto make sure it is securely locked.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

● The seatback should not be reclinedany more than needed for comfort. Seatbelts are most effective when the pas-senger sits well back and straight up inthe seat. If the seatback is reclined, therisk of sliding under the lap belt andbeing injured is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, besure not to contact any moving parts toavoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEATADJUSTMENT

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Forward and backwardPull the center of the bar up and hold it while youslide the seat forward or backward to the desiredposition. Release the bar to lock the seat inposition.

RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull the lever up and leanback. To bring the seatback forward, pull the leverup and lean your body forward. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section. Also, the seatback can be reclinedto allow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped and the shift selector (CVT) is in P (Park)or the manual transmission is in N (Neutral) withthe parking brake applied.

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’sseat)Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjustthe seat height until the desired position isachieved.

REAR FOLDING SEAT SYSTEM (if soequipped)

WRS0719 WRS0720 WRS0721

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Interior trunk access (if so equipped)The trunk can be accessed from the rear seat forloading and unloading, as shown.

1. Stow the outboard seat belts with the clipbefore folding the rear seatbacks.

When folding the passenger’s side rearseatback, first disconnect and stow the cen-ter seat belt. See “Stowing the rear centerseat belt” later in this section.

2. Pull up on the strap �A located on the topoutboard side of the seat to be folded.

3. Fold the seatback down.

WARNING

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seat when it is in thefold-down position. Use of these areasby passengers without proper restraintscould result in serious injury in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

● When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latched posi-tion. If they are not completely secured,passengers may be injured in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Closely supervise children when theyare around cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriously in-jured. Keep the car locked, with the rearseatback and trunk lid securely latchedwhen not in use, and prevent children’saccess to car keys.

LRS0728 WRS0726


Folding the rear cushions andseatbacks (if so equipped)

1. Lift up on the front edge of the seat cushionand fold it toward the front of the vehicle.

2. Fold down the rear head restraint. Pull thehead restraint forward and rotate until itclicks into the locked position �1 .

WRS0827 LRS0730 LRS0733


3. To return the head restraint to the normalposition, push down �1 and release, thenrotate up until in position �2 .

4. Fold down seatbacks. See “Interior trunkaccess” earlier in this section.

WARNING

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seat when it is in thefold-down position. Use of these areasby passengers without proper restraintscould result in serious injury in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

● When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latched posi-tion. If they are not completely secured,passengers may be injured in an acci-dent or sudden stop.


LRS0734 LRS0731


Center armrest (if so equipped)

Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNING

Head restraints supplement the other ve-hicle safety systems. They may provideadditional protection against injury in cer-tain rear end collisions. Adjust the headrestraints properly, as specified in thissection. Check the adjustment aftersomeone else uses the seat. Do not attachanything to the head restraint stalks orremove the head restraint. Do not use theseat if the head restraint has been re-moved. If the head restraint was removed,reinstall and properly adjust the head re-straint before an occupant uses the seat-ing position. Failure to follow these in-structions can reduce the effectiveness ofthe head restraints. This may increase therisk of serious injury or death in acollision.

The illustration shows the seating positionsequipped with head restraints. All of the headrestraints are adjustable.

� Indicates the seating position is equipped witha head restraint.

+ Indicates the seating position is not equippedwith a head restraint.

WIC1097 LRS2000


Components1. Head restraint

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

AdjustmentAdjust the head restraint so the center is levelwith the center of the seat occupant’s ears.

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.LRS0887 WRS0134 LRS0888


To lower, push and hold the lock knob and pushthe head restraint down.

RemovalUse the following procedure to remove the ad-justable head restraints.

1. Pull the head restraint up to the highestposition.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint properly so it is notloose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head re-straint before an occupant uses the seatingposition.

Install1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes

in the seat. Make sure the head restraint isfacing the correct direction. The stalk withthe adjustment notches �1 must be installedin the hole with the lock knob �2 .

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push thehead restraint down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint before anoccupant uses the seating position.

LRS0889 LRS0890 LRS0891


Front-seat Active Head Restraints

The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-ing the force that the seatback receives from theoccupant in a rear-end collision. The movementof the head restraint helps support the occu-pant’s head by reducing its backward movementand helping absorb some of the forces that maylead to whiplash-type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for collisionsat low to medium speeds in which it is said thatwhiplash injury occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certainrear-end collisions. After the collision, the headrestraints return to their original position.

Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly asdescribed in this section.

SPA1025


PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-justed and you are sitting upright and well back inyour seat with both feet on the floor, your chancesof being injured or killed in an accident and/or theseverity of injury may be greatly reduced.NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of yourpassengers to buckle up every time you drive,even if your seating position includes a supple-mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts be wornat all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS


WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat and, if appro-priate, in a child restraint.

WARNING

● The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in an acci-dent. Serious injury or death can occurif the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016


WARNING

● Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never put the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck. Thebelt should be away from your face andneck, but not falling off your shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low and snug aspossible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THEWAIST. A lap belt worn too high couldincrease the risk of internal injuries inan accident.

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securelyfastened to the proper buckle.

● Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

● Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

● Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

● If the seat belt warning light glows con-tinuously while the ignition is turnedON with all doors closed and all seatbelts fastened, it may indicate a mal-function in the system. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

● No changes should be made to the seatbelt system. For example, do not modifythe seat belt, add material, or installdevices that may change the seat beltrouting or tension. Doing so may affectthe operation of the seat belt system.Modifying or tampering with the seatbelt system may result in serious per-sonal injury.

● Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-vated, it cannot be reused and must bereplaced together with the retractor.See your NISSAN dealer.

● Removal and installation of preten-sioner system components should bedone by a NISSAN dealer.

● All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any collisionby a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-mends that all seat belt assemblies inuse during a collision be replaced un-less the collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and continue tooperate properly. Seat belt assembliesnot in use during a collision should alsobe inspected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation is noted.

● All child restraints and attaching hard-ware should be inspected after any col-lision. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s inspection instructionsand replacement recommendations.The child restraints should be replacedif they are damaged.

SSS0014


PREGNANT WOMENNISSAN recommends that pregnant women useseat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug andalways position the lap belt as low as possiblearound the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulderbelt over your shoulder and across your chest.Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-dominal area. Contact your doctor for specificrecommendations.

INJURED PERSONSNISSAN recommends that injured persons useseat belts. Check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes.

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this

section.

Manual front seat shownWRS0719


�2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractorand insert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear and feel the latch engage.

● The retractor is designed to lock dur-ing a sudden stop or on impact. Aslow pulling motion permits the seatbelt to move, and allows you somefreedom of movement in the seat.

● If the seat belt cannot be pulled fromits fully retracted position, firmly pullthe belt and release it. Thensmoothly pull the belt out of the re-tractor.

�3 Position the lap belt portion low and snugon the hips as shown.

�4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack. Be sure theshoulder belt is routed over your shoulderand across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seatingpositions three-point seat belts have two modesof operation:

● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modeallows the seat belt to extend and retract to allowthe driver and passengers some freedom ofmovement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat beltwhen the vehicle slows down rapidly or duringcertain impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for childrestraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat beltcannot be extended again until the seat belttongue is detached from the buckle and fullyretracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR modeafter the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-straints” later in this section for more information.

The ALR mode should be used only forchild restraint installation. During normalseat belt use by an occupant, the ALR modeshould not be activated. If it is activated, itmay cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-sion. It can also change the operation ofthe front passenger air bag. See “Frontpassenger air bag and status light” later inthis section.

WRS0137 WRS0138


WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat the seatbacks are completely se-cured in the latched position. If they arenot completely secured, passengers maybe injured in an accident or sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

�1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button onthe buckle. The seat belt automatically re-tracts.

Checking seat belt operationSeat belt retractors are designed to lock seat beltmovement by two separate methods:

● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from theretractor.

● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,check the operation as follows:

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forwardquickly. The retractor should lock and re-strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check orif you have any questions about seat belt opera-tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

LRS0767


Center of the rear seat (except SE-Rmodel)The rear seat center seat belt has a connectortongue �1 and a seat belt tongue �2 . Both theconnector tongue and the seat belt tongue mustbe securely latched for proper seat belt opera-tion.

WARNING

● Always fasten the connector tongueand the seat belt in the order shown.

● Always make sure both the connectortongue and the seat belt tongue aresecured when using the seat belt orinstalling a child restraint. Do not usethe seat belt or child restraint with onlythe seat belt tongue attached. Thiscould result in serious personal injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop.

SSS0240 SSS0241

WRS0735


Stowing the rear center seat belt

When folding down the rear seat, the center seatbelt can be retracted into a stowed position asfollows:

�1 Hold the connector tongue so that the seatbelt does not retract suddenly when thetongue is released from the connectorbuckle. Release the connector tongue byinserting a suitable tool such as key into theconnector buckle �A .

�2 Retract the seat belt up to the retractor base.

�3 Insert the seat belt connector buckle into thefabric sleeve to stow.

WARNING

● Do not unfasten the rear center seatbelt connector except when foldingdown the rear seat.

● When attaching the rear center seatbelt connector, be certain that the seat-backs are completely secured in thelatched position and the rear centerseat belt connector is completelysecured.

● If the rear center seat belt connectorand the seatbacks are not secured inthe correct position, serious personalinjury may result in an accident or sud-den stop.

WRS0736


Attaching the rear center seat belt

Always be sure the center seat belt connectortongue and connector buckle are attached. Dis-connect only when folding down the rear seat.

To connect the buckle:

�1 Pull out the connector buckle from the fabricsleeve.

�2 Pull out the connector tongue.

�3 Pull the seat belt and secure the receiverbuckle until it clicks.

The center seat belt connector tongue and re-ceiver buckle are indicated by the > and < marks.

The center seat belt connector tongue can beattached only into the rear center seat belt con-nector buckle.

To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the seatbelts” earlier in this section.

WARNING

● Do not unfasten the rear center seatbelt connector except when foldingdown the rear seat.

● When attaching the rear center seatbelt connector, be certain that the seat-backs are completely secured in thelatched position and the rear centerseat belt connector is completelysecured.

● If the rear center seat belt connectorand the seatbacks are not secured inthe correct position, serious personalinjury may result in an accident or sud-den stop. Shoulder belt height adjustment (front

seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-justed to the position best for you. See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section. Toadjust, pull out the adjustment button �1 andmove the shoulder belt anchor to the desiredposition �2 , so the belt passes over the center ofthe shoulder. The belt should be away from yourface and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul-der belt anchor into position.

LRS0242


WARNING

● After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move the shoul-der belt anchor up and down to makesure it is securely fixed in position.

● The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best for you.Failure to do so may reduce the effec-tiveness of the entire restraint systemand increase the chance or severity ofinjury in an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERSIf, because of body size or driving position, it isnot possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder beltand fasten it, an extender that is compatible withthe installed seat belts is available that can bepurchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in(200 mm) of length and may be used for eitherthe driver or front passenger seating position.See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur-chasing an extender if an extender is required.

WARNING

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, madeby the same company which made theoriginal equipment seat belts, shouldbe used with NISSAN seat belts.

● Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary use couldresult in serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

● Never use seat belt extenders to installchild restraints. If the child restraint isnot secured properly, the child could beseriously injured in a collision or a sud-den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seatbelts to dry in the shade. Do not allow theseat belts to retract until they are completelydry.

● If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, the seatbelts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulderbelt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

● Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components, such asbuckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wiresand anchors, work properly. If loose parts,deterioration, cuts or other damage on thewebbing is found, the entire seat belt as-sembly should be replaced.


Children need adults to help protect them.They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in thismanual, child safety information is available frommany other sources, including doctors, teachers,government traffic safety offices, and communityorganizations. Every child is different, so be sureto learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraintsystems:

● Rear-facing child restraint

● Forward-facing child restraint

● Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.Generally, infants up to about 1 year and lessthan 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facingchild restraints. Forward-facing child restraintsare available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.Booster seats are used to help position a vehiclelap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longeruse a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fitthem properly. The shoulder belt maycome too close to the face or neck. Thelap belt may not fit over their small hipbones. In an accident, an improperly fit-ting seat belt could cause serious or fatalinjury. Always use appropriate childrestraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-tories require the use of approved child restraintsfor infants and small children. See “Child re-straints” later in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle byusing either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth-ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seatbelt. See “Child restraints” section for more infor-mation.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rear seat.Studies show that children are safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat than inthe front seat.

This is especially important because yourvehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”later in this section.

INFANTSInfants up to at least 1 year old should be placedin a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-mends that infants be placed in child restraintsthat comply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. You should choose a child restraintthat fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDRENChildren that are over one year old and weigh atleast 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward-facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions for minimum and maximum weightand height recommendations. NISSAN recom-mends that small children be placed in childrestraints that comply with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. You should choose a childrestraint that fits your vehicle and always followthe manufacturer’s instructions for installationand use.

CHILD SAFETY


LARGER CHILDREN

Children who are too large for child restraintsshould be seated and restrained by the seat beltswhich are provided. The seat belt may not fitproperly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used toobtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in acommercially available booster seat if the shoul-der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lapportion of the seat belt goes across the abdo-men. The booster seat should raise the child sothat the shoulder belt is properly positionedacross the top, middle portion of the shoulderand the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seatcan only be used in seating positions that have athree-point type seat belt. The booster seatshould fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi-fying that it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. Once the child has grown sothe shoulder belt is no longer on or near the faceand neck, use the shoulder belt without thebooster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in the cargoarea. The child could be seriously injuredor killed in a sudden stop or collision.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

ARS1098

CHILD RESTRAINTS


WARNING

● Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use and installa-tion of child restraints could result inserious injury or death of a child orother passengers in a sudden stop orcollision:

– The child restraint must be used andinstalled properly. Always follow allof the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions for installation and use.

– Infants and children should never beheld on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-gest adult cannot resist the forces ofa collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both achild and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all childrestraints be installed in the rearseat. Studies show that children aresafer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat. If youmust install a forward-facing childrestraint in the front seat, see“Forward-facing child restraint in-stallation using the seat belts” laterin this section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the frontseat. An inflating air bag could seri-ously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint must only beused in the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child restraintthat will fit the child and vehicle.Some child restraints may not fitproperly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand loads from childrestraints that are properly fitted.

– Never use the anchor points for adultseat belts or harnesses.

– A child restraint with a top tetherstrap should not be used in the frontpassenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-sible after fitting the child restraint.

– Infants and children should alwaysbe placed in an appropriate child re-straint while in the vehicle.

● When the child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with the LATCH systemor a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, loose objects can injure occu-pants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle canbecome very hot. Check the seating sur-face and buckles before placing a child inthe child restraint.

WRS0256


This vehicle is equipped with a universal childrestraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-tem. Some child restraints include rigid orwebbing-mounted attachments that can be con-nected to these anchors. For details, see “LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-tem” later in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible childrestraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints forinfants and children of various sizes. When se-lecting any child restraint, keep the followingpoints in mind:

● Choose only a restraint with a label certifyingthat it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● If the child restraint is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the child restraintand check the various adjustments to besure the child restraint is compatible withyour child. Choose a child restraint that isdesigned for your child’s height and weight.Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated. Canadian law requires thetop tether strap on forward-facing childrestraints be secured to the designated an-chor point on the vehicle.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchorpoints that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchorsand Tethers for CHildren) system compatiblechild restraints. This system may also be referredto as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.With this system, you do not have to use a vehicleseat belt to secure the child restraint.

LATCH system lower anchor locationsLRS0724


LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-tions for proper use and installation ofchild restraints could result in serious in-jury or death of a child or other passen-gers in a sudden stop or collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatiblechild restraints only at the locationsshown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in thecenter rear seating position usingthe LATCH lower anchors. The childrestraint will not be secured properly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-ing your fingers into the lower anchorarea. Feel to make sure there are noobstructions over the anchors suchas seat belt webbing or seat cushionmaterial. The child restraint will notbe secured properly if the lower an-chors are obstructed.

LATCH lower anchor locationThe LATCH lower anchors are located at the rearof the seat cushion near the seatback. A label isattached to the seatback to help you locate theLATCH lower anchors.

Installing child restraint LATCH loweranchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include tworigid or webbing-mounted attachments that canbe connected to two anchors located at certainseating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt tosecure the child restraint. Check your child re-straint for a label stating that it is compatible withLATCH. This information may also be in the in-structions provided by the child restraint manu-facturer.

LATCH lower anchor locationWRS0700

LATCH webbing-mounted attachmentLRS0661


When installing a child restraint, carefully readand follow the instructions in this manual andthose supplied with the child restraint.

Top tether anchor point locationsThe child restraint top tether strap must be usedwhen installing the child restraint with the LATCHlower anchor attachments or seat belts. See “In-stalling top tether strap” later in this section.

If you have any questions when installing atop tether strap child restraint on the rearseat, consult your NISSAN dealer for de-tails.

Anchor points �1 are located on the rear parcelshelf.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING LATCHRefer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Childsafety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions.

LATCH rigid-mounted attachmentLRS0662 LRS0723


2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Checkto make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-erly attached to the lower anchors.

3. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing-mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourhand to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

Rear-facing web-mounted – step 2WRS0801

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2WRS0802

Rear-facing – step 3LRS0673


4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe LATCH attachment path. The child re-straint should not move more than 1 inch (25mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forwardand check to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the restraint isnot secure, tighten the LATCH attachmentas necessary, or put the restraint in anotherseat and test it again. You may need to try adifferent child restraint or try installing byusing the vehicle seat belt (if applicable).Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve-hicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 1through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING THE SEATBELTS

Rear-facing – step 4LRS0674 WRS0256


WARNING

● The three-point seat belt with Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must beused when installing a child restraint.Failure to use the ALR mode will resultin the child restraint not being properlysecured. The restraint could tip over orbe loose and cause injury to a child in asudden stop or collision. Also, it canchange the operation of the front pas-senger air bag. See “Front passengerair bag and status light” later in thissection.

● When installing a child restraint systemin the rear center position, both thecenter seat belt connector tongue andbuckle tongue must be secured. See“Attaching the rear center seat belt” inthis section.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Childsafety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rearseats:

1. Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in the frontseat. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the restraint manufacturer’sinstructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

Rear-facing – step 1WRS0256



3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to theEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the seatbelt; press downward and rearward firmly inthe center of the child restraint to compressthe vehicle seat cushion and seatback whilepulling up on the seat belt.





6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe seat belt path. The child restraint shouldnot move more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward and checkto see if the belt holds the restraint in place.If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seatbelt as necessary, or put the restraint inanother seat and test it again. You may needto try a different child restraint. Not all childrestraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraintmode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGLATCHRefer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Childsafety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facingchild restraint using the LATCH system:


2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Checkto make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-erly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint. See “Installing top tether strap” in thissection. Do not install child restraints thatrequire the use of a top tether strap in seat-ing positions that do not have a top tetheranchor.


Forward-facing web-mounted – step 2WRS0799


3. The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. Ifthe head restraint is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to reinstall the headrestraint when the child restraint is re-moved. See “Head restraints” in this sectionfor head restraint adjustment information.

If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint and it is interferingwith the proper child restraint fit, try anotherseating position or a different child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing-mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer’s instructions to remove anyslack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe LATCH attachment path. The child re-straint should not move more than 1 inch (25mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forwardand check to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the restraint isnot secure, tighten the LATCH attachmentas necessary, or put the restraint in anotherseat and test it again. You may need to try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2WRS0800

Forward-facing – step 4LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 6WRS0697


7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 1through 6.

FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGTHE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) must be usedwhen installing a child restraint. Failure touse the ALR mode will result in the childrestraint not being properly secured. Therestraint could tip over or be loose andcause injury to a child in a sudden stop orcollision. Also, it can change the opera-tion of the front passenger air bag. See“Front passenger air bag and status light”later in this section.

When installing a child restraint system inthe rear center position, both the centerseat belt connector tongue and buckletongue must be secured. See “Attachingthe rear center seat belt” in this section.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Childsafety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facingchild restraint using the vehicle seat belt in therear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint inthe front seat, it should be placed in aforward-facing direction only. Movethe seat to the rearmost position. Childrestraints for infants must be used in

the rear-facing direction and, there-fore, must not be used in the front seat.


The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.If the head restraint is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to reinstall thehead restraint when the child restraintis removed. See “Head restraints” in thissection for head restraint adjustment, re-moval and installation information.

If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint and it is interferingwith the proper child restraint fit, try anotherseating position or a different child restraint.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –step 1

WRS0699


3. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint (rear seat installation only). See “In-stalling top tether strap” in this section. Donot install child restraints that require the useof a top tether strap in seating positions thatdo not have a top tether anchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). It reverts toEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.





6. Remove any additional slack from the seatbelt; press downward and rearward firmly inthe center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while pulling up on the seatbelt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer’s instructions to remove anyslack.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe seat belt path. The child restraint shouldnot move more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward and checkto see if the belt holds the restraint in place.If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seatbelt as necessary, or put the restraint inanother seat and test it again. You may needto try a different child restraint. Not all childrestraints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2through 8.




10. If the child restraint is installed in the frontpassenger seat, place the ignition switch inthe ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light or should illumi-nate. If this light is not illuminated, see �Frontpassenger air bag and status light� in thissection. Move the child restraint to an-other seating position. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-straint mode) is canceled.

INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAPFirst, secure the child restraint with the LATCHlower anchors (rear outboard seat positions only)or the seat belt, as applicable.

1. Flip up the anchor cover �1 from the anchorpoint which is located directly behind thechild seat.

Forward-facing – step 10 (Type A)LRS0351

Forward-facing — step 10 (Type B)LRS0316 LRS0723


2. If necessary, raise or remove the head re-straint to position the top tether strap overthe top of the seatback. If the head restraintis removed, store it in a secure place. Besure to reinstall the head restraint when thechild restraint is removed. See “Head re-straints” in this section for head re-straint adjustment, removal and instal-lation information.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint on the rear parcel shelf.

4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint in-stallation procedure steps in this sectionbefore tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing atop tether strap, consult your NISSANdealer for details.

BOOSTER SEATSPrecautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not usedproperly, the risk of a child being injuredin a sudden stop or collision greatlyincreases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion ofthe belt is away from the child’s faceand neck and the lap portion of thebelt does not cross the stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is notbehind the child or under the child’sarm.

– A booster seat must only be installedin a seating position that has alap/shoulder belt.

LRS0455


Booster seats of various sizes are offered byseveral manufacturers. When selecting anybooster seat, keep the following points in mind:

● Choose only a booster seat with a labelcertifying that it complies with Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213 or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● Make sure the child’s head will be properlysupported by the booster seat or vehicleseat. The seatback must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. For example, if alow back booster seat �1 is chosen, thevehicle seatback must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. If the seatback islower than the center of the child’s ears, ahigh back booster seat �2 should be used.

● If the booster seat is compatible with yourvehicle, place the child in the booster seatand check the various adjustments to besure the booster seat is compatible with thechild. Always follow all recommended pro-cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

The instructions in this section apply to boosterseat installation in the rear seats or the frontpassenger seat.

LRS0453 LRS0464


Booster seat installation

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in theAutomatic Locking Retractor mode whenusing a booster seat with the seat belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Childsafety”, “Child restraints” and “Booster seats”sections before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in therear seat or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in thefront seat, move the seat to the rear-most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Onlyplace it in a front-facing direction. Alwaysfollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned onthe vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-straint o obtain the correct booster seat fit. Ifthe head restraint is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to reinstall thehead restraint when the booster seat isremoved. See “Head restraints” in this sec-tion for head restraint adjustment, removaland installation information.

WRS0699Front passenger position

LRS0454


If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint and it is interferingwith the proper booster seat fit, try anotherseating position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt lowand snug on the child’s hips. Be sure tofollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belttoward the retractor to take up extra slack.Be sure the shoulder belt is positionedacross the top, middle portion of the child’sshoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for adjusting theseat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-tions for properly fastening a seat beltshown in “Three-point type seat belt withretractor” earlier in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the frontpassenger seat, place the ignition switch inthe ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light or may or may notilluminate, depending on the size of the childand the type of booster seat being used. See“Front passenger air bag and status light”later in this section.

Type ALRS0351

Type BLRS0316


PRECAUTIONS ONSUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-tion contains important information concerningthe following systems:

● Driver and passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air BagSystem)

● Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag

● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-mental air bag

● Seat belt with pretensioner

Supplemental front-impact air bag system:The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can helpcushion the impact force to the head and chest ofthe driver and front passenger in certain frontalcollisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag system: This system can helpcushion the impact force to the chest and pelvicarea of the driver and front passenger in certainside impact collisions. The side air bags are de-signed to inflate on the side where the vehicle isimpacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-mental air bag system: This system can helpcushion the impact force to the head of occu-pants in front and rear outboard seating positionsin certain side-impact collisions. The curtain airbags are designed to inflate on the side wherethe vehicle is impacted.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-signed to supplement the crash protection pro-vided by the driver and front passenger seat beltsand are not a substitute for them. Seat beltsshould always be correctly worn and the occu-pant seated a suitable distance away from thesteering wheel, instrument panel and door finish-ers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section forinstructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM


WARNING

● The front air bags ordinarily will notinflate in the event of a side impact, rearimpact, rollover, or lower severity fron-tal collision. Always wear your seatbelts to help reduce the risk or severityof injury in various kinds of accidents.

● The front passenger air bag will notinflate if the passenger air bag statuslight is lit or if the front passenger seatis unoccupied. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in thissection.

● The seat belts and the front air bags aremost effective when you are sitting wellback and upright in the seat. The frontair bags inflate with great force. Evenwith the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-tem, if you are unrestrained, leaningforward, sitting sideways or out of posi-tion in any way, you are at greater risk ofinjury or death in a crash. You may alsoreceive serious or fatal injuries from thefront air bag if you are up against itwhen it inflates. Always sit back againstthe seatback and as far away as practi-cal from the steering wheel or instru-ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

● The driver and front passenger seat beltbuckles are equipped with sensors thatdetect if the seat belts are fastened. TheAdvanced Air Bag System monitors theseverity of a collision and seat belt us-age then inflates the air bags asneeded. Failure to properly wear seatbelts can increase the risk or severity ofinjury in an accident.

● The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sensor(pressure sensor) that turns the frontpassenger air bag OFF under someconditions. This sensor is only used inthis seat. Failure to be properly seatedand wearing the seat belt can increasethe risk or severity of injury in an acci-dent. See “Front Passenger air bag andstatus light” later in this section.

● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-ing wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase therisk that they are injured when the frontair bag inflates.

WRS0031


WARNING

● Never let children ride unrestrained orextend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold them inyour lap or arms. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041


ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044


WARNING

● Children may be severely injured orkilled when the front air bags, side airbags or curtain air bags inflate if theyare not properly restrained. Pre-teensand children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat, if possible.

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating front air bag could seriously in-jure or kill your child. See “Child re-straints” earlier in this section fordetails.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bags and roof-mounted curtainside-impact supplemental air bags:

● The side air bags and curtain air bagsordinarily will not inflate in the event ofa frontal impact, rear impact, rollover orlower severity side collision. Alwayswear your seat belts to help reduce therisk or severity of injury in various kindsof accidents.

ARS1045 WRS0256 SSS0101


WARNING

● The seat belts, the side air bags andcurtain air bags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back and upright inthe seat with both feet on the floor. Theside air bag and curtain air bag inflatewith great force. Do not allow anyone toplace their hand, leg or face near theside air bag on the side of the seatbackof the front seat or near the side roofrails. Do not allow anyone sitting in thefront seats or rear outboard seats toextend their hand out of the window orlean against the door. Some examplesof dangerous riding positions areshown in the previous illustrations. WARNING

● When sitting in the rear seat, do nothold onto the seatback of the front seat.If the side air bag inflates, you may beseriously injured. Be especially carefulwith children, who should always beproperly restrained. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

● Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere with sideair bag inflation.

SSS0188 WRS0032


SSS0159 SSS0162


1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impactsupplemental air bag

2. Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag modules

3. Supplemental front-impact air bagmodules

4. Crash zone sensor5. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)6. Occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor)7. Pretensioner8. Side satellite sensor

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System(front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-vanced Air Bag System for the driver and frontpassenger seats. This system is designed tomeet certification requirements under U.S. regu-lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,all of the information, cautions and warn-ings in this manual still apply and must befollowed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag islocated in the center of the steering wheel. Thepassenger supplemental front-impact air bag ismounted in the dashboard above the glove box.The front air bags are designed to inflate in higherseverity frontal collisions, although they may in-LRS0725


flate if the forces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper front air bag system opera-tion.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dualstage inflators. It also monitors information fromthe crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant clas-sification sensor (pressure sensor) and passen-ger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation isbased on the severity of a collision and seat beltusage for the driver. For the front passenger, itadditionally monitors the weight of an occupantor object on the seat and seat belt tension. Basedon information from the sensors, only one front airbag may inflate in a crash, depending on thecrash severity and whether the front occupantsare belted or unbelted. Additionally, the frontpassenger air bag may be automatically turnedOFF under some conditions, depending on theweight detected on the passenger seat and howthe seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bagis OFF, the passenger air bag status light will beilluminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light willnot be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See“Front passenger air bag and status light” later in

this section for further details. One front air baginflating does not indicate improper performanceof the system.

If you have any questions about your air bagsystem, please contact NISSAN or your NISSANdealer. If you are considering modification of yourvehicle due to a disability, you may also contactNISSAN. Contact information is contained in thefront of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noisemay be heard, followed by the release of smoke.This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate afire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,help to cushion the impact force on the face andchest of the front occupants. They can help savelives and reduce serious injuries. However, aninflating front air bag may cause facial abrasionsor other injuries. Front air bags do not providerestraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat beltsshould be correctly worn and the driver and pas-senger seated upright as far as practical awayfrom the steering wheel or instrument panel. Thefront air bags inflate quickly in order to helpprotect the front occupants. Because of this, the

force of the front air bag inflating can increase therisk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or isagainst, the front air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when theignition switch is in the ON or START posi-tion.



Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF under some con-ditions. Read this section carefully tolearn how it operates. Proper use of theseat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-essary for most effective protection. Fail-ure to follow all instructions in thismanual concerning the use of seats, seatbelts and child restraints can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger air bag status lightor is located near the climate controls. Thelight operates as follows:

● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: Theor is OFF and the front passenger airbag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,child or child restraint as outlined in this

section: The or illuminates toindicate that the front passenger air bag isOFF and will not inflate in a crash.

● Occupied passenger seat and the passen-ger meet the conditions outlined in this sec-

tion: The light or is OFF to in-dicate that the front passenger air bag isoperational.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operatedunder some conditions as described below inaccordance with U.S. regulations. If the frontpassenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in acrash. The driver air bag and other air bags in yourvehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reducethe risk of injury or death from an inflating air bagto certain front passenger seat occupants, suchas children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are usedto meet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classificationsensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of thefront passenger seat cushion and is designed todetect an occupant and objects on the seat byweight. It works together with seat belt sensorsdescribed later. For example, if a child is in thefront passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag Sys-tem is designed to turn the passenger air bagOFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if achild restraint of the type specified in the regula-

Type ALRS0351

Type BLRS0316


tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’sweight can be detected and cause the air bag toturn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-tion can vary depending on the front passengerseat belt sensors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and theamount of tension on the seat belt, such as whenit is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). Based on theweight on the seat detected by the occupantclassification sensor and the belt tension de-tected on the seat belt, the Advanced Air BagSystem determines whether the front passengerair bag should be automatically turned OFF asrequired by the regulations.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who areproperly seated and using the seat belt as out-lined in this manual should not cause the passen-ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Forsmall adults it may be turned OFF, however if theoccupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sittingon an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being outof position), this could cause the sensor to turnthe air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupantimproperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode(child restraint mode), this could cause the airbag to be turned OFF. Always be sure to be

seated and wearing the seat belt properly for themost effective protection by the seat belt andsupplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.NISSAN also recommends that appropriate childrestraints and booster seats be properly installedin a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupantclassification sensor and seat belt sensors aredesigned to operate as described above to turnthe front passenger air bag OFF for specifiedchild restraints as required by the regulations.Failing to properly secure child restraints and touse the ALR mode (child restraint mode) mayallow the restraint to tip or move in an accident orsudden stop. This can also result in the passen-ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of beingOFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this sectionfor proper use and installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied thepassenger air bag is designed not to inflate in acrash. However, heavy objects placed on theseat could result in air bag inflation, because ofthe object’s weight detected by the occupantclassification sensor. Other conditions could alsoresult in air bag inflation, such as if a child isstanding on the seat, or if two children are on theseat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupantsare seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you canmonitor when the front passenger air bag is au-tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.The light will not illuminate when the front pas-senger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicatingthat the air bag is OFF), it could be that theperson is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seatproperly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,the passenger air bag status light may or may notbe illuminated, depending on the size of the childand the type of child restraint being used. If the airbag status light is not illuminated (indicating thatthe air bag might inflate in a crash), it could bethat the child restraint or seat belt is not beingused properly. Make sure that the child restraint isinstalled properly, the seat belt is used properlyand the occupant is positioned properly. If the airbag status light is not illuminated, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-minate even though you believe that the childrestraint, the seat belts and the occupant areproperly positioned, the system may be sensingan unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag isOFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that thesystem is OFF by using a special tool. However,


until you have confirmed with your dealer thatyour air bag is working properly, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The air bag system and passenger air bag statuslight will take a few seconds to register a changein the passenger seat status. For example, if alarge adult who is sitting in the front passengerseat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bagstatus light will go from OFF to ON for a fewseconds and then to OFF. This is normal systemoperation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger airbag system, the supplemental air bag warninglight , located in the meter and gauges areain the center of the instrument panel, will blink.Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Other supplemental front-impact air bagprecautions

WARNING

● Do not place any objects on the steer-ing wheel pad or on the instrumentpanel. Also, do not place any objectsbetween any occupant and the steeringwheel or instrument panel. Such ob-jects may become dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury if the front airbags inflate.

● Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components will behot. Do not touch them; you may se-verely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental air bag system. This isto prevent accidental inflation of thesupplemental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or front end structure.This could affect proper operation ofthe front air bag system.

● Tampering with the front air bag systemmay result in serious personal injury.Tampering includes changes to thesteering wheel and the instrumentpanel assembly by placing materialover the steering wheel pad and abovethe instrument panel or by installingadditional trim material around the airbag system.

● Modifying or tampering with the frontpassenger seat may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial on the seat cushion or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, on the seat that are not specifi-cally designed to assure proper air bagoperation. Additionally, do not stow anyobjects under the front passenger seator the seat cushion and seatback. Suchobjects may interfere with the properoperation of the occupant classifica-tion sensor (pressure sensor).

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe seat belt system. This may affect thefront air bag system. Tampering withthe seat belt system may result in seri-ous personal injury.


● Work on and around the front air bagsystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. The Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS) wiring should not bemodified or disconnected. Unautho-rized electrical test equipment andprobing devices should not be used onthe air bag system.

● A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshield couldaffect the function of the supplementalair bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the supplemental front airbag system and guide the buyer to the appropri-ate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impactsupplemental air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside of theseatback of the front seats. The curtain air bagsare located in the side roof rails. These systemsare designed to meet voluntary guidelines to helpreduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occu-pants. However, all of the information, cau-tions and warnings in this manual still ap-ply and must be followed. The side air bagsand curtain air bags are designed to inflate inhigher severity side collisions, although they may

inflate if the forces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity side impact.They are designed to inflate on the side where thevehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in cer-tain side collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper side air bag and curtain airbag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bagsinflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followedby release of smoke. This smoke is not harmfuland does not indicate a fire. Care should be takennot to inhale it, as it may cause irritation andchoking. Those with a history of a breathing con-dition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,help to cushion the impact force on the chest ofthe front occupants. Curtain air bags help tocushion the impact force to the head of occu-pants in the front and rear outboard seating po-sitions. They can help save lives and reduceserious injuries. However, an inflating side air bagand curtain air bag may cause abrasions or otherinjuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do notprovide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as far aspractical away from the side air bag. Rear seatpassengers should be seated as far away as

LRS0259


practical from the door finishers and side roofrails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflatequickly in order to help protect the front and rearoutboard occupants. Because of this, the force ofthe side air bag and curtain air bag inflating canincrease the risk of injury if the occupant is tooclose to, or is against, these air bag modulesduring inflation. The side air bags and curtain airbags will deflate quickly after the collision is over.

The side air bags and curtain air bags op-erate only when the ignition switch is in theON or START position.


WARNING

● Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. Also, do notplace any objects (an umbrella, bag,etc.) between the front door finisherand the front seat. Such objects maybecome dangerous projectiles andcause injury if a side air bag inflates.

● Right after inflation, several side air bagand curtain air bag system componentswill be hot. Do not touch them; you mayseverely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe side air bag and curtain air bagsystems. This is to prevent damage to oraccidental inflation of the side air bagand curtain air bag or damage to theside air bag and curtain air bag systems.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or side panel. Thiscould affect proper operation of theside air bag and curtain air bag systems.

● Tampering with the side air bag systemmay result in serious personal injury.For example, do not change the frontseats by placing material near the seat-backs or by installing additional trimmaterial, such as seat covers, aroundthe side air bag.

● Work around and on the side air bagand curtain air bag systems should bedone by a NISSAN dealer. Installationof electrical equipment should also bedone by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wir-ing harnesses* should not be modifiedor disconnected. Unauthorized electri-cal test equipment and probing devicesshould not be used on the side air bagsystem.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the side air bag andcurtain air bag systems and guide the buyer tothe appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Seat belts with pretensioners (frontseats)

WARNING

● The pretensioners cannot be reused af-ter activation. They must be replacedtogether with the retractor and buckleas a unit.


● If the vehicle becomes involved in afrontal collision but a pretensioner isnot activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if nec-essary, replaced by your NISSANdealer.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pretensioner system. This is to pre-vent damage to or accidental activationof the pretensioners. Tampering withthe pretensioner system may result inserious personal injury.

● Work around and on the pretensionersystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the pretensioner system.

● If you need to dispose of a pretensioneror scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSANdealer. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.

The pretensioner system activates in conjunctionwith the front air bag system. Working with theseat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt

when the vehicle becomes involved in certaintypes of collisions, helping to restrain front seatoccupants.

The pretensioner is encased within the seat beltretractor. These seat belts are used the same wayas conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-leased and a loud noise may be heard. Thissmoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters allowthe seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) toreduce forces against the chest.

If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys-tem, the supplemental air bag warninglight will not come on, will flash intermit-tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain onafter the ignition switch has been placed in theON or START position. In this case, the preten-sioner system may not function properly. It mustbe checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to thenearest NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the pretensioner systemand guide the buyer to the appropriate sectionsin this Owner’s Manual.


1. SRS Front Air Bag Warning LabelsSUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELSWarning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle asshown in the illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel, moni-tors the circuits of the supplemental front-impactair bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impactsupplemental air bag and seat belt pretensionersystems. The monitored circuits include the Airbag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone sensor, sat-ellite sensors, occupant classification system,front air bag modules, side air bag modules,curtain air bag modules, pretensioners and allrelated wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON orSTART position, the supplemental air bag warn-ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and thenturns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and preten-sioner systems need servicing:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side airbag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems maynot operate properly. They must be checked andrepaired. Take your vehicle to the nearestNISSAN dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the front air bag,side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-sioner systems will not operate in an ac-cident. To help avoid injury to yourself orothers, have your vehicle checked by aNISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

WRS0897 LRS0100


Repair and replacement procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bagsand pretensioners are designed to inflate on aone-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it isdamaged, the supplemental air bag warning lightremains illuminated after inflation has occurred.Repair and replacement of these supplementalair bag systems should be done only by aNISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain airbags, pretensioners and related parts should bepointed out to the person performing the mainte-nance. The ignition switch should always beplaced in the LOCK position when working underthe hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

● Once a front air bag, side air bag, orcurtain air bag has inflated, the air bagmodule will not function again andmust be replaced. Additionally, if any ofthe front air bags inflate, the activatedpretensioner must also be replaced.The air bag module and pretensionershould be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.The air bag module and pretensionercannot be repaired.

● The front air bag, side air bag, curtainair bag systems and the pretensionersystem should be inspected by aNISSAN dealer if there is any damage tothe front end or side portion of thevehicle.

● If you need to dispose of the supple-mental air bag or pretensioner systemsor scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSANdealer. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.


2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5g (gravity)-force gauge (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Engine oil pressure gauge (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 2-7Trip computer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Outside temperature display (if so equipped) . . . . . . 2-8

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . 2-9Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Vehicle security system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-17NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-22Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Instrument panel storage (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 2-28Seatback pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31Trunk divider (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31Cargo net (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32Grocery hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34Power windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34Manual windows (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Electric moonroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39Map lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

1. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn signal switch (P. 2-21); Manualshift paddles (if so equipped) (P. 5-14)

2. Steering wheel switch for audio controland Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem (if so equipped) (P. 4-61, 4-63)

3. Driver’s supplemental air bag/Horn(P. 1-41, 2-25)

4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)5. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-23)6. Cruise control main/set switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-19)

7. Windshield wiper/washer switch(P. 2-20)

8. Storage bin (if so equipped) (P. 2-27)9. Audio system (P. 4-32, 4-35, 4-39)10. Center ventilator (P. 4-14)11. Passenger’s supplemental air bag

(P. 1-41)12. Side ventilator (P. 4-14)13. Storage bin (if so equipped) (P. 2-28)14. Engine oil pressure gauge

(if so equipped) (P. 2-7)15. g (gravity)-force gauge (if so equipped)

(P. 2-5)16. Hazard warning flasher switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-24)17. Hazard warning flasher switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-24); Manual shiftmode switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-14)

18. Navigation system* (if so equipped)(P. 4-45)

19. Glove box (P. 2-31)20. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-41)21. Climate control (P. 4-14)22. Shift selector (P. 5-12)23. Power outlet (P. 2-26)24. Ignition switch (P. 5-7)

WIC1600

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

25. Tilt steering (P. 3-27)26. Storage bin (P. 2-28)27. Hood release lever (P. 3-23)28 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-16)* Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).


1. Tachometer2. Fuel gauge/odometer/transmission

position indicator/engine coolant tem-perature gauge/Instrument brightnesslevel/trip computer (if so equipped)

3. Speedometer

4. Instrument brightness control/changebutton for twin trip odometer/changebutton for trip computer (if soequipped)

LIC1014

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

SpeedometerThe speedometer indicates the vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayedwhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance ofindividual trips.

To switch between the odometer and the twin tripodometers press the instrument brightnesscontrol/change button.

Changing the display:

Push the instrument brightness control/changebutton to change the display as follows:

With twin trip odometer:

Odometer → Trip A → Trip B → Odometer

With trip computer:

Odometer → Trip A → Trip B → DTE → InstantFuel Economy → Average Fuel Consumption →Average Speed → Journey time → Odometer

Resetting the trip odometer:

Push the instrument brightness control/changebutton for more than 1 second to reset the cur-rently displayed trip odometer to zero.

LIC1015 WIC1508


Loose fuel cap warning messagePush the reset button �A for more than 1 secondto reset the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning mes-sage �B after the fuel cap has been tightened.For additional information see “Fuel-filler cap” inthe “Pre-driving checks and adjustments”sectionof this manual.

TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engineinto the red zone �1 .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-gine speed. Operating the engine in thered zone may cause serious enginedamage.

g (gravity)-FORCE GAUGE (if soequipped)This gauge shows the straight-line accelerationand deceleration g-forces while you are driving.

NOTE:

The g-force gauge does not indicate cor-nering g-forces.

LRS2003 LIC1021 LIC1113


ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

NOTE:

The ignition switch must be placed in theON position for the gauge to give a reading.

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-ture. The engine coolant temperature is within thenormal range when the reading is within the zone�A shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with theoutside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates a coolant tempera-ture near the hot (H) end of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasethe temperature. If the gauge is over thenormal range, stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible. If the engine is over-heated, continued operation of the ve-hicle may seriously damage the engine.See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “Incase of emergency”section for immediateaction required

FUEL GAUGE

NOTE:

The ignition switch must be placed in theON position for the gauge to give a reading.

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel levelin the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The low fuel warning light comes on when theamount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-ters E (Empty).

LIC1530 LIC1529


The indicates that the fuel-filler door islocated on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon aspossible. After a few driving trips,

the light should turn off. If the

light remains on after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see “Mal-function Indicator Light (MIL)” later inthis section.

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE (ifso equipped)

The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys-tem oil pressure while the engine is running.When the engine speed is high, the engine oilpressure is also high. When the engine speed islow, the gauge indicates lower oil pressure.

Engine oil pressure also changes based on en-gine temperature. The oil pressure will be higherwhen the engine is cold and lower when theengine is warm.

CAUTION

● This gauge is not designed to indicatelow engine oil level. Use the dipstick tocheck the oil level. (See “Engine oil” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.)

● If the gauge needle does not move withthe proper amount of engine oil, havethe vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer. Continued vehicle operation insuch a condition could cause seriousdamage to the engine.

TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, modes of the trip computer can beselected by pushing the trip computer changebutton on the instrument panel located near thespeedometer. The following modes can be se-lected in the display:

● Distance to empty

● Instant fuel economy

● Average fuel consumption

● Average speed

● Journey time

LIC1114


Distance to empty (dte—mile or km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides youwith an estimation of the distance that can bedriven before refueling. The dte is constantly be-ing calculated, based on the amount of fuel in thefuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

NOTE:

When driving uphill or rounding curves, thefuel in the tank shifts, which may momen-tarily change the display.

Instant fuel economy

The instant fuel economy mode shows the instantfuel consumption. The display updates instantlywhen driving.

Average fuel consumption (Mpg orl/100km)

The average fuel consumption mode shows theaverage fuel consumption since the last reset.Resetting is done by pressing the change buttonfor more than approximately 1 second. The dis-play is updated every 30 seconds. At about thefirst 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the displayshows (----).

Average speed (mph or km/h)

The average speed mode shows the averagevehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is doneby pressing the trip or change button for morethan approximately 1 second. The display is up-dated every 30 seconds. The first 30 secondsafter a reset, the display shows (----).

Journey time

The journey time mode shows the time since thelast reset. The displayed time can be reset bypressing the change button for more than ap-proximately 1 second.

Trip computer reset

Pushing the change button for more than 3 sec-onds will reset all modes except Trip A and dis-tance to empty (dte).

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY(if so equipped)

The outside temperature function provides a dis-play of the outside temperature when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position.

The display of positive temperatures is unsigned(blank), negative temperatures are prefixed with aminus sign.


or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ warning light(if so equipped)

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

or Brake warning light P position selecting warning light(CVT models) (if so equipped)

Overdrive off indicator light (CVT models)

Charge warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Security indicator light

Door open warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Side light and headlight indicator light (green)

Electric power steering warning light Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)position indicator light (CVT models)

Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise main switch indicator light(if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low fuel warning light Cruise set switch indicator light(if so equipped)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicatorlight (if so equipped)

Low tire pressure warning light (if so equipped) or Front passenger air bag statuslight

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light(if so equipped)

High beam indicator light (blue)

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS


CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brakeand place the ignition switch in the ON positionwithout starting the engine. The following lightswill come on:

or , , , , ,

If equipped, the following lights come on brieflyand then go off:

or , , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicatean open circuit in the electrical system.Have the system repaired promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

or Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS)warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light illuminates and then turns off. Thisindicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while theengine is running, or while driving, it may indicate

the ABS is not functioning properly. Have thesystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-tion is turned off. The brake system then operatesnormally, but without anti-lock assistance. See“Brake system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake andthe foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on when the parkingbrake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.If the light comes on while the engine is runningwith the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-hicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluidas necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thewarning system checked by a NISSANdealer.

WARNING

● Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the warning light is on. Driv-ing could be dangerous. If you judge itto be safe, drive carefully to the nearestservice station for repairs. Otherwise,have your vehicle towed because driv-ing it could be dangerous.

● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as pedal travel.

● If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brakefluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked at aNISSAN dealer.


Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warningindicator

When the parking brake is released and thebrake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brakewarning light and the Anti-lock Braking System(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate theABS is not functioning properly. Have the brakesystem checked, and if necessary, repaired by aNISSAN dealer promptly. Avoid high-speed driv-ing and abrupt braking. (See “Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS) warning light” in this section.)

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the charging system is not func-tioning properly. Turn the engine off and checkthe generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSANdealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the generatorbelt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are notclosed securely while the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position.

Electric power steeringwarning light

WARNING

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe steering will not work. Steering willbe harder to operate.

● When the power steering warning lightilluminates with the engine running,there will be no power assist for thesteering. You will still have control of thevehicle but the steering will be harder tooperate. Have the power steering systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the power steering warning light illumi-nates. After starting the engine, the power steer-ing warning light turns off. This indicates thepower steering system is operational.

If the power steering warning light illuminateswhile the engine is running, it may indicate thepower steering system is not functioning properlyand may need servicing. Have the power steeringsystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When the power steering warning light illumi-nates with the engine running, there will be no

power assist for the steering but you will still havecontrol of the vehicle. At this time, greater steer-ing effort is required to operate the steeringwheel, especially in sharp turns and at lowspeeds.

See “Power steering” in the “Starting and driving”section.

Engine oil pressure warninglight

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If thelight flickers or comes on during normal driving,pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engineimmediately and call a NISSAN dealer or otherauthorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is notdesigned to indicate a low oil level. Use thedipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could cause se-rious damage to the engine almost imme-diately. Such damage is not covered bywarranty. Turn off the engine as soon as itis safe to do so.


Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fueltank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuelin the tank when the fuel gauge reaches E(Empty), showing no more fuel bars.

Low tire pressure warning light(if so equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tirepressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of lowtire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is notfunctioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this light illuminates for about 1 secondand turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tirepressure, the warning light will illuminate.

When the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates, you should stop and adjust thetire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-mended COLD tire pressure shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label locatedin the driver’s door opening. The low tirepressure warning light does not automati-cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-ommended pressure, the vehicle must bedriven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)to activate the TPMS and turn off the lowtire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres-sure gauge to check the tire pressure.

For additional information, see “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving”section and in the “In case of emergency”section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the lowtire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-mately 1 minute when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position. The light will remain onafter the 1 minute. Have the system checked by aNISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

WARNING

● If the light does not illuminate with theignition switch placed in the ON posi-tion, have the vehicle checked by aNISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

● If the light illuminates while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,pull off the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible.Driving with under-inflated tires maypermanently damage the tires and in-crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-rious vehicle damage could occur andmay lead to an accident and could re-sult in serious personal injury. Checkthe tire pressure for all four tires. Adjustthe tire pressure to the recommendedCOLD tire pressure shown on the Tireand Loading Information label locatedin the driver’s door opening to turn thelow tire pressure warning light OFF. Ifthe light still comes on while drivingafter adjusting the tire pressure, a tiremay be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-place it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.


● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash for approximately 1 minute.The light will remain on after 1 minute.Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.

● Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by NISSAN could affect theproper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

● The TPMS is not a substitute for theregular tire pressure check. Be sure tocheck the tire pressure regularly.

● If the vehicle is being driven at speedsof less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), theTPMS may not operate correctly.

● Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the 4 wheels correctly.

Low windshield-washer fluidwarning light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the windshield-washerfluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid

as necessary. See “Windshield-washer fluid” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

NISSAN Intelligent Key™warning light (if so equipped)

The Intelligent Key warning light illuminates greenwhen the ignition switch can be turned. TheIntelligent Key warning light illuminates red whenthe ignition switch cannot be turned.

The Intelligent Key warning light blinks red if theIntelligent Key is taken outside of the vehiclewhile the ignition switch is placed in the ACC orON position.

● If the Intelligent Key warning light blinks,make sure of the location of the IntelligentKey as soon as possible. The Intelligent Keyshould be carried by the driver while operat-ing the vehicle.

● The Intelligent Key warning light turns offabout 10 seconds after the Intelligent Key isbrought inside the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key warning light blinks greenindicating that the Intelligent Key battery is almostdischarged.

See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

P position selecting warninglight (CVT models) (if soequipped)

The light blinks red and the warning buzzersounds if you are outside of the vehicle with theIntelligent Key and the engine is off, but the shiftselector is not in the P (Park) position.

When the warning light blinks, place the ignitionswitch in the ON position, move the shift selectorto the P position, then place the ignition switch inthe LOCK position.

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fasten yourseat belts. The light illuminates whenever theignition switch is placed in the ON or STARTposition and remains illuminated until the driver’sseat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chimesounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’sseat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate ifthe front passenger’s seat belt is not fastenedwhen the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed inthe ON position, the system does not activate thewarning light for the front passenger.


Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system” sectionfor precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warninglight

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON orSTART position, the supplemental air bag warn-ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and thenturns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and preten-sioner systems need servicing and your vehiclemust be taken to a NISSAN dealer:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplementalrestraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-tensioners may not function properly. For addi-tional details see “Supplemental restraint sys-tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section of thismanual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the front air bag,side air bag, curtain air bag systemsand/or pretensioner systems will not op-erate in an accident. To help avoid injuryto yourself or others, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) positionindicator light (CVT models)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this indicator light shows the shift selec-tor position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Cruise main switch indicatorlight (if so equipped)

The light comes on when the cruise control mainswitch is pushed. The light goes out when themain switch is pushed again. When the cruisemain switch indicator light comes on, the cruisecontrol system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicatorlight (if so equipped)

The light comes on while the vehicle speed iscontrolled by the cruise control system. If the lightblinks while the engine is running, it may indicatethe cruise control system is not functioning prop-erly. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.

or Front passenger airbag status light

The front passenger air bag status light (or ) will be lit and the passenger front airbag will be OFF depending on how the frontpassenger seat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation,see “Front passenger air bag and status light” inthe “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light(blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight highbeams are on and goes out when the low beamsare selected.


The high beam indicator light also comes onwhen the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinkswhile the engine is running, it may indicate apotential emission control malfunction.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may also comeon steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to makesure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closedtightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light shouldturn off if no other potential emission controlsystem malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds whenthe engine is not running, it indicates that thevehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

Operation

The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on inone of two ways:

● Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — Anemission control system malfunction hasbeen detected. Check the fuel-filler cap ifthe LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message isdisplayed in the odometer. If the fuel-fillercap is loose or missing, tighten or install thecap and continue to drive the vehicle.The light should turn off after a fewdriving trips. If the light does not turnoff after a few driving trips, have the vehicleinspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do notneed to have your vehicle towed to thedealer.

● Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — Anengine misfire has been detected which maydamage the emission control system. To re-duce or avoid emission control system dam-age:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargobeing hauled or towed.

The Malfunction Indicator Lamp Light may stopblinking and come on steady. Have the vehicleinspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not needto have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-ing the emission control system checkedand repaired as necessary could lead topoor driveability, reduced fuel economy,and possible damage to the emission con-trol system.

Overdrive off indicator light(CVT models)

The overdrive off indicator light illuminates whenthe overdrive off mode is selected.

For additional information, see “ContinuouslyVariable Transmission (CVT)” in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Security indicator light

For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This lightblinks whenever the ignition switch is placed inthe LOCK, OFF or ACC position.


For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light blinkswhen the ignition switch is placed in the LOCKposition with the key removed from the ignitionswitch.

The blinking security indicator light indicates thatthe security systems equipped on the vehicle areoperational.

For additional information, see “Security sys-tems” later in this section.

Side light and headlightindicator light (green)

The side light and headlight indicator light illumi-nates when the side light or headlight position isselected. See “Headlight and turn signal switch”later in this section for further details.

Slip indicator light (if soequipped)

This indicator will blink when the VDC system orthe traction control system is operating, thusalerting that the vehicle is nearing its tractionlimits. The road surface may be slippery.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signalswitch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turnedon.

Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) OFF indicator light (if soequipped)

This indicator light comes on when the VehicleDynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF.This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control sys-tem is not operating.

Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switchagain or restart the engine and the system willoperate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion of this manual.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes onwhen you place the ignition switch in the ONposition. The light will turn off after about 2 sec-onds if the system is operational. If the light stayson or comes on along with the SLIP indicator lightwhile you are driving, have the Vehicle DynamicControl system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system isoperating, you might feel slight vibration or hearthe system working when starting the vehicle oraccelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERSBrake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.When a disc brake pad requires replacement, itmakes a high pitched scraping sound when thevehicle is in motion, whether or not the brakepedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chimeA chime sounds if the driver’s door is openedwhile the key is left in the ignition switch. Removethe key and take it with you when leaving thevehicle.

Light reminder chimeWith the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door isopened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-ing the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ door buzzer(if so equipped)The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any oneof the following improper operations is found.

● The ignition switch is not returned to theLOCK position when locking the doors.


● The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehiclewhen locking the doors.

● The Intelligent Key is taken outside the ve-hicle when operating the vehicle.

● Any doors are not closed securely whenlocking the doors.

When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check boththe vehicle and the Intelligent Key. See “NISSANIntelligent Key™” in the “Pre-driving checks andadjustments” section.

Parking brake reminder chimeA chime sounds if the parking brake is set and thevehicle is driven. The chime will stop if the parkingbrake is released or the vehicle speed returns tozero.

Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-tems:

● Vehicle security system (if so equipped)

● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if soequipped)

The vehicle security system provides visual andaudible alarm signals if someone opens the doorswhen the system is armed. It is not, however, amotion detection type system that activates whena vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannotprevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior orexterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-ways secure your vehicle even if parking for abrief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Beaware of your surroundings, and park in secure,well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, suchas component locks, identification markers, andtracking systems, are available at auto supplystores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealermay also offer such equipment. Check with yourinsurance company to see if you may be eligiblefor discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle securitysystem

1. Close all windows. (The system can bearmed even if the windows are open.)

2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion and remove the key.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doorscan be locked with:

● the power door lock switch (if the door isopened, locked and then closed).

● the key — master or mechanical (Intelli-gent Key models).

LIC0301

SECURITY SYSTEMS


● any request switch (Intelligent Key models).

● the keyfob or Intelligent Key.

Keyfob and Intelligent Key operation:

● Push the button. All doors lock.The hazard lights flash twice and the hornbeeps once to indicate all doors arelocked.

● When the button is pushed withall doors locked, the hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. Refer to“Silencing the horn beep feature” in the“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-tion later in this manual.

4. Confirm that the indicator light comeson. The light stays on for about 30seconds. The vehicle security system is nowpre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve-hicle security system automatically shiftsinto the armed phase. The light beginsto flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’sdoor is unlocked by the key, a requestswitch, the keyfob or Intelligent Key, or if theignition switch is placed in the ACC or ONposition, the system will not arm.

● If the key is turned slowly when lockingthe driver’s door, the system may notarm. Furthermore, if the key is turnedbeyond the vertical position toward theunlock position to remove the key, thesystem may be disarmed when the keyis removed. If the indicator light fails toglow for 30 seconds, unlock the dooronce and lock it again.

● Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the system willarm with all doors closed and lockedwith the ignition switch placed in theOFF position.

Vehicle security system activationThe vehicle security system will give the followingalarm:

● The headlights blink and the horn soundsintermittently.

● The alarm automatically turns off after ap-proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarmreactivates if the vehicle is tampered withagain. The alarm can be shut off by unlockingthe driver’s door with the key, a requestswitch or by pressing the button onthe keyfob or Intelligent Key.

The alarm is activated by:

● opening a door without using the key, arequest switch, keyfob or Intelligent Key(even if the door is unlocked by using theinside lock knob or the power door lockswitch).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’sdoor with the key, pressing the button onthe keyfob or Intelligent Key, or by unlocking alldoors with any request switch (Intelligent Keymodels).

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of aregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused by


another registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the ONposition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF orLOCK position and wait approximately 10seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

Statement related to Section 15 of FCCRules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANTASSY — IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULDVOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-ATE THE EQUIPMENT.

Security indicator light

For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This lightblinks whenever the ignition switch is placed inthe LOCK, OFF or ACC position.

For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light blinkswhen the ignition switch is placed in the LOCKposition with the key removed from the ignitionswitch.

This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Im-mobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-functioning, the light will remain on while theignition switch is placed in the ON position.

LIC0474


If the light still remains on and/or the en-gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer forNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-vice as soon as possible. Please bring allregistered keys that you have when visitingyour NISSAN dealer for service.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates whenthe ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at thefollowing speed:

�1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operationcan be adjusted by turning the knob toward�A (Slower) or �B (Faster).

�2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

�3 High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-tion

Push the lever up �4 to have one sweep opera-tion (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you �5 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the windshield andobscure your vision which may lead to anaccident. Warm the windshield with thedefroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir isempty.

● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluidreservoir with windshield-washer fluidconcentrates at full strength. Some me-thyl alcohol based windshield-washerfluid concentrates may permanentlystain the grille if spilled while filling thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir.

WIC0854

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH


● Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-centrates with water to the manufactur-er’s recommended levels before pour-ing the fluid into the windshield-washerfluid reservoir. Do not use thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir tomix the windshield-washer fluid con-centrate and water.

To defrost the rear window glass and outsidemirrors (if so equipped), start the engine andpush the rear window defroster switch on. Therear window defroster indicator light on theswitch comes on. Push the switch again to turnthe defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns offafter approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch or dam-age the rear window defroster.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

�1 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the front parking, tail, license plate andinstrument panel lights come on.

�2 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the headlights come on and all the otherlights remain on.

LIC0720

Type ALIC0706

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDEMIRROR (if so equipped)DEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNALSWITCH


CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

Headlight beam select

�1 To select the high beam function, push thelever forward. The high beam lights come onand the light illuminates.

�2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

�3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes theheadlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver systemIf the ignition switch is placed in the OFF positionwhile the headlight switch is in theor position, the headlights will turn off after5 minutes.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-tomatically turns off the headlights after aperiod of time, you should turn the head-light switch to the OFF position when theengine is not running to avoid dischargingthe vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM(Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-duced intensity when the engine is started withthe parking brake released. The daytime runninglights operate with the headlight switch in theOFF position or in the position. Turn theheadlight switch to the position for fullillumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine isstarted, the daytime running lights do not illumi-nate. The daytime running lights illuminate whenthe parking brake is released. The daytime run-ning lights will remain on until the ignition switchis placed in the OFF position.

Type BLIC0688 WIC0859


WARNING

When the daytime running light system isactive, tail lights on your vehicle are noton. It is necessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could causean accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESSCONTROLThe instrument brightness control operates whenthe headlight control switch is in theor position and the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position.

The brightness level will be shown briefly in themeter’s display area whenever the control is op-erated.

Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru-ment panel lights when driving at night. Whenthe maximum or minimum intensity is met,a short chime will sound.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

�1 Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

�2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up ordown to the point where the indicator lightbegins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

WIC1294 WIC0860


FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switchto the position, then turn the fog lightswitch to the position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switchto the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beamsselected for the fog lights to operate. The foglights automatically turn off when the high beamheadlights are selected.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers whenyou must stop or park under emergency condi-tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

● If stopping for an emergency, be sure tomove the vehicle well off the road.

● Do not use the hazard warning flasherswhile moving on the highway unlessunusual circumstances force you todrive so slowly that your vehicle mightbecome a hazard to other traffic.

● Turn signals do not work when the haz-ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switchplaced in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving.

WIC0861 LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSWITCH


To sound the horn, push the top portion of thesteering wheel’s center pad.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system. Tam-pering with the supplemental front air bagsystem may result in serious personalinjury.

The vehicle should be driven with the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-ing conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDCsystem reduces the engine output to reducewheel spin. The engine speed will be reducedeven if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. Ifmaximum engine power is needed to free a stuckvehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFFswitch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart theengine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dy-namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

WIC1324 WIC0534

HORN VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)


The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the low or high position of the switch,as desired, depending on the temperature.The indicator light in the switch will illumi-nate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,automatically turning the heater on and off.The indicator light will remain on as long asthe switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before youleave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switchoff.

CAUTION

● Do not use the seat heater for extendedperiods or when no one is using theseat.

● Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seatmay become overheated.

● Do not place anything hard or heavy onthe seat or pierce it with a pin or similarobject. This may result in damage to theheater.

● Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately with adry cloth.

● When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-lar materials.

● If any abnormalities are found or theheated seat does not operate, turn theswitch off and have the system checkedby your NISSAN dealer.

● The battery could run down if the seatheater is operated while the engine isnot running.

The power outlets are for powering electricalaccessories such as cellular telephones. Theyare rated at 12 Volt, 120W (10A) maximum.

The power outlet located on the bottom centerportion of the instrument panel is powered di-rectly by the vehicle’s battery. The power outletlocated in the console (if so equipped) is pow-ered only when the ignition switch is placed in theACC or ON position.

WIC1441Instrument panel

LIC1022

HEATED SEAT (if so equipped) POWER OUTLET


CAUTION

● The outlet and plug may be hot duringor immediately after use.

● The power outlets are not designed foruse with a cigarette lighter.

● Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

● Use power outlets with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

● Avoid using power outlets when the airconditioner (if so equipped), headlightsor rear window defroster is on.

● Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plug mayoverheat or the internal temperaturefuse may open.

● When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water or any otherliquids to contact the outlet.

MAP POCKETSConsole (if so equipped)LIC1478 LIC1023

STORAGE


STORAGE BINPull the lid down to open the storage bin.

Some models are equipped with a soft lining inthe storage bin for storing sunglasses.

WARNING

Keep the storage bin closed while drivingto prevent an accident.

STORAGE TRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays tohelp prevent injury in an accident or sud-den stop.

INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGE (ifso equipped)

To open the storage bin, push and release. Thestorage tray will automatically move to the openposition.

LIC1025 WIC1036

LIC1024


● The inside of the storage bin can get hot. Donot place objects inside which can melt orbe easily deformed.

WARNING

Keep the lid closed while driving to helpprevent contents from becoming projec-tiles causing injury in an accident of dur-ing a sudden stop.

SEATBACK POCKETS (if soequipped)The seatback pockets are located on the back ofthe driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pocketscan be used to store maps.

Type ALIC1116

Type BLIC1328


CUP HOLDERSAdjust the cup holder size by turning the adjust-ment knob and sliding the cup holder divider tothe desired position.

CAUTION

● Avoid abrupt starting and braking whenthe cup holder is being used to preventspilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, itcan scald you or your passenger.

● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in anaccident.

Lower the rear center armrest to access the cupholders.

FrontWIC1531

Rear (if so equipped)WIC1097


GLOVE BOXOpen the glove box by pulling the handle.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

To open the console box, press in on the lever �1and raise the lid �2 .

To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.

TRUNK DIVIDER (if so equipped)

CAUTION

The trunk divider does not contain anysecure locking mechanisms so it shouldnot be used as a secure storage forvaluables.

The trunk divider allows for the creation of ahidden storage compartment in the trunk or whenlowered, a temporary storage surface for wetitems.

The trunk divider can be accessed through thelowering of the rear seats or through the trunk.

WIC1487 WIC1504


Once the rear seats have been lowered, the trunkdivider can be opened by pressing down on thesecuring latch and pushing the divider toward therear of the vehicle. For more information on thelowering of rear seats, see “Interior trunk access”in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-mental restraint system” section of this manual.

Access the trunk divider by opening the trunk. Toremove the trunk divider, press down on securinglatch �1 and lower the trunk divider to about 45°.Pull and lift the divider out of the holding brackets�2 to remove from the trunk.

CARGO NET (if so equipped)

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause personalinjury.

● Be sure to secure all four hooks into theretainers. The cargo restrained in thenet must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) orthe net may not stay secured.

Accessing through rear seatsLIC1030

Accessing through trunkLIC1031 WIC1032


The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargoarea from moving around while the vehicle is inmotion.

To install the cargo net, attach the net to theretainers.

To remove the cargo net, detach the net from thecargo net retainers.

GROCERY HOOKS (if so equipped)The grocery hooks are located in the trunk andcan be used to hang a standard size plasticgrocery bag.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 20lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook.

LIC0802 LIC0748


POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped)

WARNING

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehicle whileit is in motion and before closing thewindows. Use the window lock switchto prevent unexpected use of the powerwindows.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls and becometrapped in a window. Unattended chil-dren could become involved in seriousaccidents.

The power windows operate when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position, or for about45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed inthe OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’sdoor is opened during this period of about 45seconds, power to the windows is canceled.

1. Window lock button2. Power door lock switch3. Front passenger’s side window switch4. Right rear passenger’s window switch5. Left rear passenger’s window switch6. Driver’s side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window switchThe driver’s side control panel is equipped withswitches to open or close the front and rearpassenger windows.

To open a window, push the switch to the firstdetent and continue to hold it down until thedesired window position is reached. To close awindow, pull the switch to the first detent andcontinue to hold up until the desired windowposition is reached.

WIC1100

WINDOWS


Front passenger’s power windowswitchThe passenger’s window switch operates onlythe corresponding passenger’s window. To openthe window, push the switch to the first detentand continue to hold it down until the desiredwindow position is reached �1 . To close thewindow, pull the switch to the first detent andcontinue to hold it up until the desired windowposition is reached �2 .

Rear power window switchThe rear power window switches open or closeonly the corresponding windows. To open thewindow, push the switch and hold it down �1 . Toclose the window, pull the switch up �2 .

Locking passengers’ windowsWhen the window lock button is depressed, onlythe driver’s side window can be opened orclosed. Push it again to cancel the window lockfunction.

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automaticoperation, press the window switch down to thesecond detent and release it; it need not be held.The window automatically opens all the way. Tostop the window, lift the switch up while thewindow is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automaticoperation, pull the switch up to the second detentand release it; it need not be held. The windowautomatically closes all the way. To stop the win-dow, press the switch down while the window isclosing.

WIC1129 LIC0718 LIC0410


Auto-reverse function

The auto-reverse function can be activated whena window is closed by automatic operation.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto-reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the window oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the window.

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced,or jump started, the power window auto-reversefunction may not operate properly. If this occurs,please contact the dealer to re-initialize thepower window auto-reverse system.

If the control unit detects something caught in awindow equipped with automatic operation as itis closing, the window will be immediately low-ered.

When the automatic operation for thedriver’s power window switch doesnot operate

If the automatic operation for the driver’s powerwindow switch does not operate properly, per-form the following procedure to initialize thepower window switch.

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

2. Press and hold the driver’s window switchdown until the window opens completely.

3. Release the switch.

4. Pull and hold the driver’s window switch upto the second detent until the window glasshas reached the full close position. Con-tinue to hold the window switch in theup position for 5 seconds after the win-dow glass has reached the full closeposition. (It is necessary for this entire stepto be completed with one continuous pull ofthe window switch.)

5. Release the switch.

Initialization is now complete. The automatic op-eration for the driver’s power window switchshould now operate.

If the automatic operation does not operate prop-erly after performing the above procedure, see aNISSAN dealer for assistance.

No initialization is required for all the other win-dow switches.


MANUAL WINDOWS (if so equipped)The side windows can be opened or closed byturning the hand crank on each door.

ELECTRIC MOONROOF

This moonroof only operates with the ignitionswitch placed in the ON position.

NOTE:

If the battery is discharged or is discon-nected, the moonroof may not operate cor-rectly, and must be reset.

See “Resetting the moonroof switch” later in thissection.

Sliding the moonroofTo open the moonroof, push and hold the switchtoward DOWN/OPEN. The moonroof will stopwhen the switch is released or when the moon-roof is fully open.

To close the moonroof, push and hold the switchtoward UP/CLOSE. The moonroof will stop whenthe switch is released or when the moonroof isfully closed.

Tilting the moonroofClose the moonroof by pushing and holding theswitch toward UP/CLOSE. Release the switch,then push and hold the UP/CLOSE switch to tiltthe moonroof up. The moonroof will stop whenthe switch is released or when the moonroofreaches the maximum tilt position.

To tilt the moonroof down, push and hold theswitch toward DOWN/OPEN. The moonroof willstop when the switch is released or when themoonroof is fully closed.

WIC0263 WIC1482

MOONROOF (if so equipped)


WARNING

● In an accident you could be thrown fromthe vehicle through an open moonroof.Always use seat belts and childrestraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body out ofthe moonroof opening while the vehicleis in motion or while the moonroof isclosing.

CAUTION

● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the moonroof before opening.

● Do not place heavy objects on themoonroof or surrounding area.

Resetting the moonroof switch

The moonroof switch may not operate properlyand may need to be reset if any of the followingconditions have occurred:

● the battery terminal has been disconnected,

● the moonroof has been manually moved,

● the moonroof motor has been removed andreinstalled after the moonroof has been re-positioned or adjusted,

● the moonroof glass panel has been adjustedor changed, or

● the electrical supply interrupted and/orsome malfunction has been detected.

Use the following reset procedure to returnmoonroof operation to normal.

1. Press the UP/CLOSE side of the moonroofswitch, until it stops and then release theswitch.

2. Push and hold the UP/CLOSE side of themoonroof switch. The moonroof panel willbegin to move in about 10 seconds.

3. Continue to hold the UP/CLOSE side of themoonroof switch while the panel moves in ajogging motion to the full tilt position. Whenthe panel reaches the full tilt position it willback up a little and stop.

4. Release the UP/CLOSE side of the moon-roof switch.

5. Within 5 seconds of completing step 4,press and continuously hold the UP/CLOSEside of the moonroof switch. After a delay of5 seconds, the panel will move from the tiltposition to the open position and back to theclose position.

6. Release the UP/CLOSE side of the moon-roof switch. Do not disconnect the power forat least 2 seconds. The moonroof is nowrestarted.

NOTE:

If the UP/CLOSE side of the moonroofswitch is released anytime during the re-starting process, all learned profile datawill be discarded and the procedure willhave to be started over.

If the moonroof still does not operate properly,have the moonroof system checked, and if nec-essary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer.

Auto-reverse function (when closing ortilting down the moonroof)

The auto-reverse function can be activated whenthe moonroof is closing or tilts down by automaticoperation when the ignition switch is placed inthe ON position or for about 45 seconds after theignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto-reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the moonroofoccurs.


WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the moonroof.

When closing:

If the control unit detects something caught in themoonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroofwill immediately open backward.

When tilting down:

If the control unit detects something caught in themoonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-mediately tilt up.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keeppushing the tilt down switch within 5 secondsafter it happens; the moonroof will fully closegradually. Make sure nothing is caught in themoonroof.

WARNING

● In an accident you could be thrown fromthe vehicle through an open moonroof.Always use seat belts and childrestraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body out ofthe moonroof opening while the vehicleis in motion or while the moonroof isclosing.

CAUTION

● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the moonroof before opening.

● Do not place heavy objects on themoonroof or surrounding area.

SunshadeOpen and close the sunshade by sliding it for-ward or backward.

If the moonroof does not closeHave your NISSAN dealer check and repair themoonroof.

The interior light has a three-position switch andoperates regardless of ignition switch position.

When the switch is in the ON position �1 , theinterior light illuminates, regardless of door posi-tion.

When the switch is in the center O position, theinterior light illuminates by opening a door.

The interior light will stay on for about 30 secondswhen:

● The doors are unlocked while the ignitionswitch is placed in the OFF position and alldoors are closed.

WIC0264

INTERIOR LIGHT


● The driver’s door is opened and then closedwhile the ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition.

● The ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition while all doors are closed.

The interior light will turn off while the 30 secondtimer is activated when:

● The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, akey or the lock-unlock switch.

● The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-sition.

When the switch is in the OFF position �2 , theinterior light does not illuminate, regardless ofdoor position.

Some vehicles are equipped with a battery saverfeature that will automatically turn off the interiorlights after approximately 15 minutes if:

● doors are open, or

● the interior light switch is in the ON position.

NOTE:

If the interior lights are turned off automati-cally by the battery saver feature, the igni-tion switch must be placed in the ON posi-tion before the interior lights will illuminateagain.

For information regarding the interior light bulbreplacement, refer to “Exterior and interior lights”in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section ofthis manual.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery. To turn the map lights on, press the button. To

turn them off, press the button again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

WIC1540

MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped)


The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exte-rior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section of this manual.

TRUNK LIGHT


MEMO


3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Remote keyless entry system (models withoutNISSAN Intelligent Key™) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-8NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13NISSAN Intelligent Key™ Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14How to use the remote keyless entryfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Warning lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Key operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Vanity mirrors (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

1. Two master keys (black) with transpon-der chip and chrome NISSAN brandsymbol on one side

2. Transponder chip3. Key number plateA key number plate is supplied with your keys.Record the key number and keep it in a safe place(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you loseyour keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates byusing the key number. NISSAN does not recordkey numbers so it is very important to keep trackof your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you havelost all keys and do not have one to duplicatefrom. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealercan duplicate it.

1. Two Intelligent Keys2. Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent

Keys)3. Key number plateNISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if soequipped)Your vehicle can only be driven with the IntelligentKeys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel-ligent Key components and NISSAN Vehicle Im-mobilizer System components.

LPD0348 WPD0363

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registeredand used with one vehicle. The new keys must beregistered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use withthe Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle Immobi-lizer System of your vehicle. Since the registra-tion process requires erasing all memory in theIntelligent Key components when registering newkeys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that youhave to the NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the IntelligentKey:

● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, whichcontains electrical components, tocome into contact with water or saltwater. This could affect the systemfunction.

● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharplyagainst another object.

● Do not change or modify the IntelligentKey.

● Wetting may damage the IntelligentKey. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key for anextended period in an area where tem-peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with akey holder that contains a magnet.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key nearequipment that produces a magneticfield, such as a TV, audio equipment andpersonal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,NISSAN recommends erasing the ID codeof that Intelligent Key from the vehicle.This may prevent the unauthorized use ofthe Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle.For information regarding the erasingprocedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key,which can be used in case of a discharged bat-tery.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lockknob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it intothe Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns tothe lock position.

The mechanical key can be used for operation inthe same way as an ordinary key.

SPA1951

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installedin the Intelligent Key slot.

See “Doors” in this section and “Storage” in the“Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM KEYSYou can only drive your vehicle using the masterkeys which are registered to the NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System components in your vehicle.These keys have a transponder chip in the keyhead.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is notnecessary when you need extra NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-cate your existing key. As many as 5 NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys can be usedwith one vehicle. You should bring all NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have toyour NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-cause the registration process will erase thememory of all key codes previously registeredinto the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.

After the registration process, these componentswill only recognize keys coded into the NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System during registration.Any key that is not given to your dealer at the timeof registration will no longer be able to start yourvehicle.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, whichcontains an electrical transponder, to come intocontact with salt water. This could affect systemfunction.

When the doors are locked using one of thefollowing methods, the doors can not be openedusing the inside or outside door handles. Thedoors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING

● Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seat belts,this provides greater safety in the eventof an accident by helping to preventpersons from being thrown from thevehicle. This also helps keep childrenand others from unintentionally open-ing the doors, and will help keep outintruders.

● Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.


DOORS


LOCKING WITH KEY

Manual (if so equipped)To lock a door, turn the key toward the front of thevehicle �1 . To unlock, turn the key toward the rear�2 .

Power (if so equipped)The power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front �1 of the vehiclelocks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear �2 of thevehicle unlocks that door. From that position,returning the key to neutral �3 (where the key canonly be removed and inserted) and turning ittoward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocksall doors �4 .

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOBTo lock the door without the key, move the insidelock knob to the lock position �1 , then close thedoor.

To unlock the door without the key, move theinside lock knob to the unlock position �2 .

Driver’s sideLPD0349 LPD0483

Inside lockWPD0291


LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the doorlock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) tothe lock position �1 . When locking the door thisway, be certain not to leave the key inside thevehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push thedoor lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’sside) to the unlock position �2 .

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver’s orfront passenger’s side) is moved to the lockposition with the key in the ignition switch and anydoor open, all doors will lock and then unlockautomatically. This helps to prevent the keys frombeing accidently locked inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

● All doors lock automatically when the vehiclespeed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).

● All doors unlock automatically when the ig-nition switch is placed in the OFF position(models with Intelligent Key system) or whenthe key is removed from the ignition switch(models without Intelligent Key system).

The automatic unlock function can be de-activated or activated. To deactivate or acti-vate the automatic door unlock system, performthe following procedure:

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,push and hold the power door lock switch tothe position (UNLOCK) for more than5 seconds.

4. When activated, the hazard indicator willflash twice. When deactivated, the hazardindicator will flash once.

5. The ignition switch must be placed in theOFF and ON position again between eachsetting change.

When the automatic door unlock system is deac-tivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignitionswitch is placed in the OFF position (models withIntelligent Key system) or when the key is re-moved from the ignition switch (models withoutIntelligent Key system). To unlock the door manu-ally, use the inside lock knob or the power doorlock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side).

Door lock switchWPD0381


CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCKChild safety locks help prevent the rear doorsfrom being opened accidentally, especially whensmall children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on theedge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the unlock position �1 , thedoor can be opened from the outside or theinside.

When the lever is in the LOCK position �2 ,the door can be opened only from the out-side.

WARNING

● Radio waves could adversely affectelectric medical equipment. Those whouse a pacemaker should contact theelectric medical equipment manufac-turer for the possible influences beforeuse.

● The remote keyless entry keyfob trans-mits radio waves when the buttons arepressed. The FAA advises radio wavesmay affect aircraft navigation and com-munication systems. Do not operate theremote keyless entry keyfob while onan airplane. Make sure the buttons arenot operated unintentionally when theunit is stored for a flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn theinterior lights on, and activate the panic alarm byusing the keyfob from outside the vehicle.

Be sure to remove the key from the vehiclebefore locking the doors.

The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi-mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effectivedistance depends on the conditions around thevehicle.

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with onevehicle. For information concerning the purchaseand use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSANdealer.

The keyfob will not function when:

● the battery is discharged

● the distance between the vehicle and thekeyfob is over 33 ft (10 m)

The panic alarm will not activate when thekey is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the keyfob:

● Do not allow the keyfob, which containselectrical components, to come intocontact with water or salt water. Thiscould affect the system function.

● Do not drop the keyfob.

● Do not strike the keyfob sharply againstanother object.

● Do not change or modify the keyfob.

● Wetting may damage the keyfob. If thekeyfob gets wet, immediately wipe untilit is completely dry.

LIC0716

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM(models without NISSAN IntelligentKey™) (if so equipped)


● Do not place the keyfob for an extendedperiod in an area where temperaturesexceed 140°F (60°C).

● Do not attach the keyfob with a keyholder that contains a magnet.

● Do not place the keyfob near equip-ment that produces a magnetic field,such as a TV, audio equipment and per-sonal computers.

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-ommends erasing the ID code of that key-fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un-authorized use to unlock the vehicle. Forinformation regarding the erasing proce-dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer. HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close the hood, trunk lid, and all doors.

4. Press the button on the keyfob. Allthe doors lock. The hazard lights flash twiceand the horn beeps once to indicate alldoors are locked.

● When the button is pressed with alldoors locked, the hazard lights flash twiceand the horn beeps once as a reminder thatthe doors are already locked.

● If a door is open and you press thebutton, the doors will lock but the horn willnot beep and the hazard lights will not flash.

The horn may or may not beep once. Refer to“Silencing the horn beep feature” in this sectionfor details.

LPD0209


Unlocking doors

Press the button on the keyfob once.

● Only the driver’s door unlocks.

● The hazard warning lights flash once if alldoors are completely closed with the ignitionswitch in any position except the ON posi-tion.

● The interior light turns on and the light timeractivates for 30 seconds when the switch isin the center O position with the ignitionswitch in any position except the ON posi-tion.

Press the button on the keyfob againwithin 5 seconds.

● All doors unlock.

● The hazard warning lights flash once if alldoors are completely closed.

The interior lights can be turned off without wait-ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into theignition and turning it to the ON or START posi-tion, locking the doors with the keyfob or pushingthe interior light switch to the OFF position.

Auto relock

When the button on the keyfob is pressed,all doors will lock automatically within 1 minuteunless one of the following operations is per-formed:

● Any door is opened.

● A key is inserted into the ignition switch andthe switch is cycled from OFF to ON.

Releasing the trunk lid (if so equipped)

Press the button on the keyfob for longerthan 0.5 seconds to open the trunk lid. The trunkrelease button on the keyfob will not operatewhen the ignition switch is in the ON position.

LPD0210 WPD0319


Using the panic alarm (if so equipped)If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pressing and holding the button on thekeyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25seconds.

The panic alarm stops when:

● it has run for 25 seconds, or

● any button is pressed on the keyfob.

Using the interior light

Press the button on the keyfob once toturn on the interior lights.

For additional information, refer to “Interior light”in the “Instruments and controls” section in thismanual.

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the keyfob.

To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 secondsonce more.

LPD0211 LPD0262


The hazard warning lights will flash once and thehorn will sound once to confirm that the hornbeep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WARNING

● Radio waves could adversely affectelectric medical equipment. Those whouse a pacemaker should contact theelectric medical equipment manufac-turer for the possible influences beforeuse.

● The Intelligent Key transmits radiowaves when the buttons are pressed.The FAA advises the radio waves mayaffect aircraft navigation and communi-cation systems. Do not operate the In-telligent Key while on an airplane. Makesure the buttons are not operated unin-tentionally when the unit is stored for aflight.

The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locksusing the remote controller function or pushingthe request switch on the vehicle without takingthe key out from a pocket or purse. The operatingenvironment and/or conditions may affect theIntelligent Key operation.

Be sure to read the following before using theIntelligent Key.

CAUTION

● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key withyou when operating the vehicle.

● Never leave the Intelligent Key in thevehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating withthe vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ-mental conditions may interfere with the opera-tion of the Intelligent Key under the followingoperating conditions:

● When operating near a location wherestrong radio waves are transmitted, such asa TV tower, power station and broadcastingstation.

● When in possession of wireless equipment,such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,and CB radio.

● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with orcovered by metallic materials.

● When any type of radio wave remote controlis used nearby.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed near anelectric appliance such as a personal com-puter.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if soequipped)


● When the vehicle is parked near a parkingmeter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditionsbefore using the Intelligent Key function or usethe mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies dependingon the operating conditions, the battery’s life isapproximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blinkgreen for about 30 seconds after the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receivingradio waves, if the key is left near equipmentwhich transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-tery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a bat-tery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section.

For models with a steering wheel lock mecha-nism: Because the steering wheel is locked elec-trically, unlocking the steering wheel with theignition switch in the Lock position is impossiblewhen the vehicle battery is completely dis-charged. Unlocking the steering wheel is impos-sible even if the Intelligent key is inserted into the

Intelligent Key port. Pay special attention that thevehicle battery is not completely discharged.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registeredand used with one vehicle. For information aboutthe purchase and use of additional IntelligentKeys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the IntelligentKey:

● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, whichcontains electrical components, tocome into contact with water or saltwater. This could affect the systemfunction.

● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharplyagainst another object.

● Do not change or modify the IntelligentKey.

● Wetting may damage the IntelligentKey. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key for anextended period in an area where tem-peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with akey holder that contains a magnet.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key nearequipment that produces a magneticfield, such as a TV, audio equipment andpersonal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSANrecommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent theunauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operatethe vehicle. For information regarding the erasingprocedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.


OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be usedwhen the Intelligent Key is within the specifiedoperating range from the request switch �1 .

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged orstrong radio waves are present near the operat-ing location, the Intelligent Key operating rangebecomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key maynot function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)from each request switch �1 .

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,handle or rear bumper, the request switches maynot function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operatingrange, it is possible for anyone, even someonewho does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push therequest switch to lock/unlock the doors.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKSPRECAUTION

● Do not push the door handle request switchwith the Intelligent Key held in your hand asillustrated. The close distance to the doorhandle will cause the Intelligent Key systemto have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-gent Key is outside the vehicle.

● After locking with the door handle requestswitch, verify the doors are securely lockedby testing them.

SPA2038 WPD0375


● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being leftinside the vehicle, make sure you carry theIntelligent Key with you and then lock thedoors.

● Do not pull the door handle before pushingthe door handle request switch. The doorwill be unlocked but will not open. Releasethe door handle once and pull it again toopen the door.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™OPERATIONYou can lock or unlock the doors without takingthe Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, youcan lock or unlock all doors by pushing the doorhandle request switch within the range of opera-tion.

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion. (Remove the key if any key is in theignition switch.)

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch �1while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors and the trunk will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice andthe outside buzzer sounds twice.

WPD0376 WPD0377


NOTE:

● Doors lock with the door handle requestswitch while a mechanical key is in the igni-tion switch or the ignition switch is pushedin.

● Doors lock with the door handle requestswitch while the ignition switch is not in theLOCK position.

● Doors do not lock by pushing the doorhandle request switch while any door isopen. However, doors lock with the me-chanical key even if any door is open.

● Doors do not lock with the door handlerequest switch with the Intelligent Key insidethe vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.However, when an Intelligent Key is insidethe vehicle, doors can be locked with an-other Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

● After locking the doors using the re-quest switch, make sure that the doorshave been securely locked by operatingthe door handles or the trunk openerswitch.

● When locking the doors using the re-quest switch, make sure to have theIntelligent Key in your possession be-fore operating the request switch toprevent the Intelligent Key from beingleft in the vehicle.

● The request switch is operational onlywhen the Intelligent Key has been de-tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protectionis equipped with the Intelligent Key.

When the driver’s side door is open, the doorsare locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put

inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;the lock will automatically unlock and the doorbuzzer sounds.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli-gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-ating the request switch to lock the door.Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket oryour other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not functionunder the following conditions:

● When the Intelligent Key is placed ontop of the instrument panel.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed ontop of the rear parcel shelf.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side the glove box or a storage bin.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side the door pockets.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed on orunder the spare tire area.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side or near metallic materials.

WPD0369


Unlocking doors

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch �1 .

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and theoutside buzzer sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch �1again within 60 seconds to unlock all doors.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking thedoors, that door may not be unlocked. Returningthe door handle to its original position will unlockthe door. If the door does not unlock after return-ing the door handle, push the door handle re-quest switch to unlock the door.

All doors will be locked automatically unless oneof the following operations is performed within 60seconds after pushing the request switch.

● Opening any door.

● Pushing the ignition switch.

● Inserting the mechanical key into the ignitionswitch.

The interior light timer illuminates for a maximumof 30 seconds when a door is unlocked and theroom light switch is in the DOOR position.

The interior light can be turned off without waitingfor 30 seconds by performing one of the follow-ing operations.

● Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion.

● Locking the doors with the remote controller.

● Switching the room light switch to the OFFposition.

WPD0377 WPD0369


Opening the trunk lid

1. Push the trunk opener request switch �A formore than 1 second while carrying the Intel-ligent Key with you.

2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound 4times.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-dentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection isequipped with the Intelligent Key.

When all doors are locked and the trunk lid isclosed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk,the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk willopen.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTEKEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTIONThe remote keyless entry function can operate alldoor locks using the remote keyless function ofthe Intelligent Key. The remote keyless functioncan operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) awayfrom the vehicle. The operating distance de-pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not func-tion under the following conditions:

● When the Intelligent Key is not within theoperational range.

● When the doors or the trunk are open or notclosed securely.

● When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-charged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelli-gent Key, be sure not to leave the key inthe vehicle.

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the button on the IntelligentKey.

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice andthe horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

LPD0478 WPD0359


CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelli-gent Key, be sure that the doors have beensecurely locked by operating the doorhandles.

Unlocking doors

1. Press the button on the IntelligentKey.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Press the button again within 60 sec-onds to unlock all doors.

All doors will be locked automatically unless oneof the following operations is performed within 1minute after pressing the button.

● Opening any doors.

● Pushing the ignition switch.

● Inserting the mechanical key into the ignitionswitch.

The interior light illuminates for a maximum of 30seconds when a door is unlocked and the roomlight switch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting for 30seconds by performing one of the following op-erations.

● Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion.

● Locking the doors with the remote controller.

● Switching the room light switch to the OFFposition.WPD0360


Releasing the trunk lid

Press the button for longer than 0.5 sec-onds to open the trunk lid. The trunk releasebutton will not operate when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position.

Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pressing and holding the button on theIntelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25seconds.

The panic alarm stops when:

● It has run for 25 seconds, or

● Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.

● Pushing the request switch on the driver orpassenger door with the Intelligent Key inrange of the door handle.

WPD0364 WPD0361


Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the Intelligent Key.

To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 secondsonce more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and thehorn will sound once to confirm that the hornbeep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

�1 P (Park) position selecting warninglight

�2 NISSAN Intelligent Key™ warning light

WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLEREMINDERS

The Intelligent Key is equipped with a functionthat is designed to minimize improper operationsand to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen.The warning buzzer sounds and the warning lightilluminates when improper operations are de-tected.

WPD0362 WPD0382


CAUTION

When the buzzer sounds and the warninglight illuminates, be sure to check boththe vehicle and the Intelligent Key.

WARNING SIGNALSTo help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-pectedly by erroneous operation of the IntelligentKey or to help prevent the vehicle from beingstolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside andoutside the vehicle and a warning light comes onin the instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or the warninglight comes on, be sure to check the vehicle andthe Intelligent Key.

Audible reminder and warning whenlocking the doorsWhen the chime or buzzer sounds from insideand outside the vehicle, check for the following:

● The ignition switch is placed in the LOCKposition.

● The Intelligent Key is not left inside the ve-hicle.

● The shift selector is in the P (Park) position.

Audible reminder and warning whenthe engine stops

When the P position selecting warning light( ) in the instrument panel blinks in red:

● Make sure the shift selector is in the P (Park)position.

When the chime sounds intermittently:

● Make sure the shift selector is in the P (Park)position and the ignition switch is placed inthe LOCK position.

If the chime sounds continuously when the driv-er’s door is opened, check the following:

● The shift selector is placed in the P (Park)position and the ignition switch is placed inthe LOCK position.

● The mechanical key is not inserted into theignition switch.

● The warning chime may stop when one ofthe following is performed:

– Returning the ignition switch to the LOCKposition.

– Removing the mechanical key.

– Closing the doors.

Alarm and warning when the enginestartsWhen the Intelligent Key system warning light( ) blinks red and the outside buzzersounds, make sure the Intelligent Key is inside thevehicle.

Warning for low battery powerWhen the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blinkgreen for about 30 seconds after the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position. This warningis to let you know that the battery of the IntelligentKey will run down soon. Replace it with a newone. Refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

NISSAN recommends replacing the battery at aNISSAN dealer.

Preventing the Intelligent Key frombeing left in the vehicleIf you lock all doors using the power door lockswitch with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle, all ofthe doors unlock immediately and the buzzer willwarn you when the door is closed.


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Possible Cause RemedyWhen pushing the door handle requestswitch

The front door beep sounds for approxi-mately 2 seconds. The doors cannot be locked. Take out the Intelligent Key from the vehicle

and push the door handle request switch.

When closing the doors

The front door beep sounds for approxi-mately 10 seconds.

The ignition knob is not placed in the LOCKposition.

Place the ignition switch in the LOCKposition.

The key warning light in the instrumentpanel blinks in red and the front door warn-ing beep sounds for approximately 3seconds.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.

The front door beep sounds for approxi-mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle. Take out the Intelligent Key from the vehicleand close the door.

When opening the driver’s door A warning chime sounds continuously.The ignition switch is not in the LOCKposition, or the mechanical key is insertedinto the ignition switch.

Place the ignition switch in the LOCKposition.Remove the mechanical key from the igni-tion switch.

When stopping the engine The P (Park) position warning light in theinstrument panel blinks in red.

The shift selector is not in the P (Park)position.

Make sure that the shift selector is in the P(Park) position and place the ignition switchin the LOCK position.

When starting the engine The key warning light in the instrumentpanel blinks in green.

The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one. See“Battery replacement” in the “Maintenanceand do-it-yourself” section.

When turning the ignition switch A warning chime sounds continuously. The ignition switch is not placed in theLOCK position.

Place the ignition switch in the LOCKposition.

When pushing the ignition switch The Intelligent Key warning light in the in-strument panel illuminates red.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. If the Intelligent Key warning light illumi-nates red even while you are carrying theIntelligent Key, the battery is completelydischarged. Replace the battery with a newone. See “Battery replacement” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.


1. Pull the hood lock release handle �1 locatedbelow the instrument panel until the hoodsprings up slightly.

2. Locate the lever �2 in between the hood andgrille and push the lever sideways with yourfingertips.

3. Raise the hood �3 .

4. Remove the support rod �4 and insert it intothe slot on the underside of the hood �5 .

When closing the hood, return the support rod toits original position, lower the hood to approxi-mately 12 inches (30 cm) above the latch andrelease it. This allows proper engagement of thehood latch.

WARNING

● Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving. Fail-ure to do so could cause the hood to flyopen and result in an accident.

● If you see steam or smoke coming fromthe engine compartment, to avoid injurydo not open the hood.

WARNING

● Do not drive with the trunk lid open. Thiscould allow dangerous exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

● Closely supervise children when theyare around cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriously in-jured. Keep the car locked, with the rearseatback and trunk lid securely latchedwhen not in use, and prevent children’saccess to car keys.WPD0383

HOOD TRUNK LID


KEY OPERATION (if so equipped)To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise. Toclose the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk liddown securely.

TRUNK LID RELEASEThe trunk lid release is located on the floor to theleft of the driver’s seat. To open the trunk lid, pullthe trunk lid release.

To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk liddown securely.

You can also open the trunk lid with the keyfob (ifso equipped) or Intelligent Key (if so equipped).Refer to “Remote keyless entry system” or“NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in this section.

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they arearound cars to prevent them from playingand becoming locked in the trunk wherethey could be seriously injured. Keep thecar locked, with the rear seatback andtrunk lid securely latched when not in use,and prevent children’s access to car keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism providesa means of escape for children and adults in theevent they become locked inside the trunk.

WPD0384Driver’s side

WPD0390 WPD0385


To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi-nated release handle until the lock releases andpush up on the trunk lid. The release handle ismade of a material that glows in the dark after abrief exposure to ambient light.

The handle is located inside the trunk compart-ment on the interior of the trunk lid.

OPENER OPERATION

The fuel-filler door release is located on the floorto the left of the driver’s seat. To open the fuel-filler door, push the release. To lock, close thefuel-filler door securely.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

● Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seriouslyinjured if it is misused or mishandled.Always stop the engine and do notsmoke or allow open flames or sparksnear the vehicle when refueling.

● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tankafter the fuel pump nozzle shuts offautomatically. Continued refueling maycause fuel overflow, resulting in fuelspray and possibly a fire.

● Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has abuilt-in safety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system and emis-sion control system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunction andpossible injury. It could also cause

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) to come on.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body toattempt to start your vehicle.

LPD0386

FUEL-FILLER DOOR


● Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death when filling portable fuelcontainers:

– Always place the container on theground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contactwith the container while you are fill-ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

● The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning mes-sage will be displayed if the fuel-fillercap is not properly tightened. Failure totighten the fuel-filler cap properly afterthe LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message

is displayed may cause the Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL) toilluminate.

● Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-

nate. If the light illuminates be-

cause the fuel-filler cap is loose ormissing, tighten or install the cap andcontinue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light

does not turn off after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see the“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” inthe “Instruments and Controls” sectionin this manual.

● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise toremove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder �1while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until itclicks. The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type.

LPD0387


Loose Fuel Cap warning message

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message dis-plays in the odometer when the fuel-filler cap isnot tightened correctly after the vehicle has beenrefueled. To turn off the warning message, do thefollowing:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as pre-viously described as soon as possible.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3. Press the loose fuel cap warning reset but-ton �A in the meter for about 1 second toturn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP warningmessage �B after tightening the fuel-fillercap.

TILT OPERATIONPush the lock lever �1 down and adjust thesteering wheel up or down �2 to the desiredposition.

Pull the lock lever up to lock the steering wheel inplace.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

To block out glare from the front, swing down thesun visor �1 .

To block glare from the side, disconnect the sunvisor from the center mount and swing it to theside �2 .

LRS2003 LPD0388

SIC2872

STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS


VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visordown and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanitymirrors are illuminated and turn on when themirror cover is open.

REARVIEW MIRRORThe night position �1 reduces glare from theheadlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position �2 when driving in daylighthours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror onthe passenger side are closer than theyappear. Be careful when moving to theright. Using only this mirror could causean accident. Use the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder to properlyjudge distances to other objects.

LPD0389 WPD0126

MIRRORS


Manual control type (if so equipped)The outside mirror can be moved in any directionfor a better rear view.

Electric control type (if so equipped)The outside mirror remote control only operateswhen the ignition switch is placed in the ACC orON position.

Rotate the control lever to select the right or leftmirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired position bymoving the control lever.

Heated mirrors (Canada only) (if soequipped)Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. Push therear window defroster switch to activate the heat-ing function. Push the switch again to deactivate,or the heating function will automatically turn offafter approximately 15 minutes.

LPD0029 WPD0274


4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner,audio and phone systems

Control panel buttons — color screen withNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

How to use the touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3How to use the back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5How to use the SETUP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Difference between predicted and actualdistances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Adjusting the screen(models without Navigation System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Adjusting the screen(models with Navigation System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Heater and air conditioner (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Air conditioner operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 4-18Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Servicing air conditioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-24Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player(Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player(Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45USB interface (models without NavigationSystem) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51USB interface (models with NavigationSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53iPod�* player operation without NavigationSystem (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55iPod�* player operation without NavigationSystem (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56iPod�* player operation with NavigationSystem (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60Steering wheel switch for audio control(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63

Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77

WARNING

● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,fire, or electrical shock.

● In case you notice any foreign object inthe system hardware, spill liquid on it,or notice smoke or smell coming fromit, stop using the system immediatelyand contact your nearest NISSANdealer. Ignoring such conditions maylead to accidents, fire or electricalshock.

CAUTION

Do not use this system if you notice anyabnormality, such as a frozen screen orlack of sound. Continued use of the sys-tem may result in accident, fire or electricshock.

1. (brightness control) button

2. Display screen

3. MAP button*

4. NAV button*

5. TRAF button*

6. SETUP button (P. 4-5)

7. BACK button

8. TUNE/SCROLL knob

9. Power button/Volume control knob

LHA1474

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

*For Navigation system control buttons, refer tothe separate Navigation System Owner’sManual.

When you use this system, make sure the engineis running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will discharge the battery, and theengine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to akey shown only on the display. These keys can beselected by touching the screen.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCHSCREEN

CAUTION

● The glass screen on the liquid crystaldisplay may break if it is hit with a hardor sharp object. If the glass breaks, donot touch the liquid crystalline material,which contains a small amount of mer-cury. In case of contact with skin, washimmediately with soap and water.

● To clean the display, never use a roughcloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or anykind of solvent or paper towel with achemical cleaning agent. They willscratch or deteriorate the panel.

● Do not splash any liquid such as wateror car fragrance on the display. Contactwith liquid will cause the system tomalfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-not be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not availablewhile driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-ate the navigation system.

WARNING

● ALWAYS give your full attention todriving.

● Avoid using vehicle features that coulddistract you. If distracted, you couldlose control of your vehicle and causean accident.

Touch screen operationSelecting the item:

Touch an item to select. For example, to selectthe “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key �1 on thescreen.

LHA1476

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3

Adjusting the item:

For screens where an item can be adjusted incre-mentally, such as when adjusting the bass andtreble for the audio system, touch the “+” key �1or the “�” key �2 to adjust the settings of an item.

When there are more items than can be dis-played on one screen, touch the up arrow �3 toscroll up the page or touch the down arrow �4 toscroll down the page.

Other items are adjusted by selecting one of a setnumber of conditions. For example, the DisplayMode can be set to “Automatic”, “Day” or “Night”.To adjust this type of item, touch the item �1 . Theitem will cycle through the available settings andthe red indicator lights to the left of the settingcondition �2 will come on or turn off accordingly.

Inputting characters:

Touch the letter key �1 .

There are some options available when inputtingcharacters.

● 123 / ABC:Changes the available character set to num-bers.

● Space:Inserts a space.

● Delete:Deletes the last inputted character with onetouch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key todelete all of the characters.

LHA1477 LHA1478 LHA1479


● OK:Completes the character input.

Touch screen maintenanceIf you clean the display screen, use a dry, softcloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use asmall amount of neutral detergent with a softcloth. Never spray the screen with water or de-tergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe thescreen.

HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON

Press the BACK button to return to theprevious screen.

HOW TO USE THE SETUP BUTTON

When the SETUP button is pressed, the Setupscreen will appear on the display. You can selectand/or adjust several functions, features andmodes that are available for your vehicle.

Audio setup

For audio setup, refer to “Audio system” in thissection.

Navigation setup

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

XM setupFor XM setup, refer to “Audio system” in thissection.

LHA1480


System setupSelect the “System” key to select and/or adjustvarious functions of the system. A screen withadditional options will appear.

Display:

Select the “Display” key to adjust the appearanceof the display. The following settings can beadjusted:

BrightnessThe brightness of the display can be set to VeryBright, Bright, Default, Dark or Very Dark. Touchthe “Brightness” key to cycle through the options.

Display ModeThe display can be adjusted to fit the level oflighting in the vehicle. Touch the “Display Mode”key to cycle through the options. “Day” and“Night” modes are suited for the respective timesof day, while “Automatic” controls the displayautomatically.

Scroll DirectionThe direction that menus scroll can be adjusted.Choose either “up” or “down”.

LHA1481 LHA1482


Clock:

Select the “Clock” key to adjust the time and theappearance of the clock on the display. The fol-lowing settings can be adjusted:

Time FormatThe clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.

Use GPS ClockWhen this setting is activated, the clock is setand continually updated via the GPS used by theNavigation System.

Set Clock ManuallyWhen this setting is activated, the clock can beset manually. Touch the “+”or “-”key to adjust thehours and minutes up or down.

Daylight Savings TimeWhen this setting is activated, daylight savingstime is on. Touch the “Daylight Savings Time” keyto toggle the setting on or off.

Time ZoneChoose the applicable time zone from the list.

Language:

Select the “Language” key to adjust the languageused by the system. The language can be set toEnglish, Français or Español.

Touch click:

Select the “Touch Click” key to toggle the touchclick feature on or off. When activated, a clicksound will be heard every time a key on thescreen is touched.

LHA1483 LHA1484 LHA1485


Beep tones:

Select the “Beep Tones” key to toggle the beeptones feature on or off. When activated, a beepsound will be heard when a pop-up messageappears on the screen or a button on the unit(such as the button) is pressed and heldfor two seconds.

Reset all settings/memory:

Select the “Reset All Settings/Memory” key toreturn all settings to default and to clear thememory.

Traffic setupRefer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

BUTTON

To change the display brightness, pressthe button. Pressing the button again willchange the display to the day or the night display.

If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, thedisplay will return to the previous display.

Press and hold the button for more thantwo seconds to turn the display off. Press thebutton again to turn the display on.

When the shift selector is shifted into the R(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows theview directly to the rear of the vehicle.

WARNING

● The system is designed as an aid to thedriver in detecting large stationary ob-jects to help avoid damaging the ve-hicle. The system will not detect smallobjects below the bumper, and may notdetect objects close to the bumper oron the ground.

● The RearView Monitor is a conveniencebut it is not a substitute for proper back-ing. Always turn and check that it is safeto do so before backing up. Alwaysback up slowly.

● Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-tor differ from actual distance becausea wide-angle lens is used.

● Make sure that the trunk is securelyclosed when backing up.

● Underneath the bumper and the cornerareas of the bumper cannot be viewedon the RearView Monitor because of itsmonitoring range limitation.

● Do not put anything on the rearviewcamera. The rearview camera is in-stalled beside the license plate light.

● When washing the vehicle with high-pressure water, be sure not to spray itaround the camera. Otherwise, watermay enter the camera unit causing wa-ter condensation on the lens, a mal-function, fire or an electric shock.

● Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-function or cause damage resulting in afire or an electric shock.

CAUTION

There is a plastic cover over the camera.Do not scratch the cover when cleaningdirt or snow from the cover.

REARVIEW MONITOR (if soequipped)


HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYEDLINESLines which indicate the vehicle clearance anddistances to objects with reference to thebumper line �A are displayed on the monitor.

They are indicated as reference distances toobjects. The lines and colors in the display indi-cate distances from the back bumper line �A inthe illustration.

�1 1.5 ft (0.5 m) red

�2 3 ft (1 m) yellow

�3 7 ft (2 m) green

�4 10 ft (3 m) green (models without NavigationSystem only)

The vehicle clearance lines are wider thanthe actual clearance.

DIFFERENCE BETWEENPREDICTED AND ACTUALDISTANCESThe distance guide line and the vehicle widthguide line should be used as a reference onlywhen the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. Thedistance viewed on the monitor is for referenceonly and may be different than the actual distancebetween the vehicle and displayed objects.

Without Navigation SystemLHA0437

With Navigation SystemWHA1531


Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-tance guide lines and the vehicle width guidelines are shown closer than the actual distance.For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to theplace �A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on

the hill is the place �B . Note that any object onthe hill is further than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, thedistance guide lines and the vehicle width guidelines are shown farther than the actual distance.For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to theplace �A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on

WHA1504 WHA1505


the hill is the place �B . Note that any object onthe hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up behind a projecting object

The position �C is shown farther than the position�B in the display. However, the position �C isactually at the same distance as the position �A .The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

the position �A if the object projects over theactual backing up course.

WHA1506


ADJUSTING THE SCREEN (modelswithout Navigation System)To adjust the quality of the screen, press thesetting control knob on the audio system.

● To adjust the Brightness or Contrast, pressthe setting control knob repeatedly until thesetting you wish to adjust is displayed. Usethe TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the dis-play to the desired level.

● Do not adjust the Brightness or Contrast ofthe RearView Monitor while the vehicle ismoving.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN (modelswith Navigation System)To adjust the quality of the screen, perform thefollowing:

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Touch “System”.

3. Touch “Display”.

4. To adjust the brightness, touch the “Bright-ness” key repeatedly to set the display toVery Bright, Bright, Default, Dark or VeryDark. Touch “Display Mode” to cycle be-tween day, night and automatic displaymodes.

Do not adjust the screen settings of the RearViewMonitor while the vehicle is moving.

LHA1272 LHA1480 LHA1482


OPERATING TIPS

● When the shift selector is shifted to R (Re-verse), the monitor screen automaticallychanges to the RearView Monitor mode.However, the radio can be heard.

● It may take some time until the RearViewMonitor is displayed after the shift selectorhas been shifted to R (Reverse). Objectsmay be distorted momentarily until the Rear-View Monitor screen is displayed com-pletely. When the shift selector is returned toa position other than R (Reverse), it may takesome time until the screen changes. Objectson the screen may be distorted until they arecompletely displayed.

● When the temperature is extremely high orlow, the screen may not clearly display ob-jects. This is not a malfunction.

● When strong light directly enters the cam-era, objects may not be displayed clearly.

● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on thescreen. This is due to strong reflected lightfrom the bumper. This is not a malfunction.

● The screen may flicker under fluorescentlight. This is not a malfunction.

● The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-tor may differ somewhat from those of theactual object.

● When the contrast of objects is low at night,pressing the setting control knob or SETUPbutton may not change the brightness.

● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in adark place or at night.

● If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,the RearView Monitor may not display ob-jects. Clean the camera.

● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner toclean the camera. This will cause discolora-tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a clothdampened with a diluted mild cleaning agentand then wipe with a dry cloth.

● Do not damage the camera as the monitorscreen may be adversely affected.

● Do not use body wax on the camera window.If body wax does get on the camera window,wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-ened with mild detergent diluted with water.


Adjust air flow direction for the driver’s and pas-senger’s side �1 , and center �2 ventilators bymoving the ventilator slide and/or ventilator as-semblies.

Open or close the ventilators �1 by using the dial.Move the dial toward the to open the ven-tilators or toward the to close them.

WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

● Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assistanceof others alone in your vehicle. Petsshould also not be left alone. Theycould accidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent operation ofthe vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.

● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

WHA0772

VENTS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual)


1. Fan control dial2. Air recirculation button3. Temperature control dial4. Air flow control dial5. Rear window defroster

Type AWHA0470


1. Fan control dial2. Air recirculation button3. Temperature control dial4. Air conditioner button5. Air flow control dial6. Rear window defroster

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, andcontrols fan speed.

Air flow control dial

The air flow control dial allows you to select theair flow outlets.

MAXA/C

— Air flows from center and sidevents with maximum cooling (airconditioning if so equipped).

— Air flows from center and sidevents.

— Air flows from center and sidevents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outletsand foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from defrosteroutlets.

● You can also select the middle position

between and or between

and .

● When the , or position isselected, the air recirculation modecannot be turned on. This prevents the win-dows from fogging.

Temperature control dialThe temperature control dial allows you to adjustthe temperature of the outlet air. To lower thetemperature, turn the dial to the left. To increasethe temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

NOTE:

The air recirculation feature is availableonly on those vehicles equipped with airconditioning.

Type BLHA0440


On position (Indicator light on):Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Press the button to the on position when:

● driving on a dusty road.

● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-senger compartment.

● for maximum cooling when using the air con-ditioner.

When the button is pressed, the air con-ditioner automatically turns on and the indicatorilluminates. When the button is pressedagain, the air recirculation mode turns off, but theair conditioner remains on.

Off position (Indicator light off):Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-ment and distributed through the selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air con-ditioner operation.

Air conditioner button(if so equipped)

The button is provided only on vehicles equippedwith an air conditioner.

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position and push the button to

turn on the air conditioner. The indicator lightcomes on when the air conditioner is operating.To turn off the air conditioner, push thebutton again.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switchFor more information about the rear window de-froster switch, see “Rear window and outsidemirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

HeatingThis mode is used to direct heated air to the footoutlets. Some air also flows from the defrostoutlets and outboard vents.

1. Push the button to the off position fornormal heating.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to theposition.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position between the middle and thehot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side andcenter vents.

1. Push the button to the off position.



4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost outletsand outboard vents to defrost/defog the win-dows.





● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-dows, turn the fan control dial to HI and thetemperature control lever to the full HOTposition.

● When the or position is se-lected, the air conditioner automaticallyturns on (however, the indicator light will notilluminate). In this position, the A/C cannotbe turned off. When the air flow control dialis turned to any position other thanor , the A/C light will illuminate (theA/C will continue operating) and can beturned off using the A/C button. This dehu-midifies the air which helps defog the wind-shield. The mode automatically turnsoff, allowing outside air to be drawn into thepassenger compartment to further improvethe defogging performance.

Bi-level heatingThis mode directs air from the side, center andthe foot outlets.





Heating and defoggingThis mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-shield.




● When the or position is se-lected, the air conditioner automaticallyturns on (however, the indicator light will notilluminate). In this position, the A/C cannotbe turned off. When the air flow control dialis turned to any position other thanor the A/C light will illuminate (theA/C will continue operating) and can beturned off using the A/C button. This dehu-midifies the air which helps defog the wind-shield. The mode automatically turnsoff, allowing outside air to be drawn into thepassenger compartment to further improvethe defogging performance.

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper bladesand air inlet in front of the windshield. Thisimproves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION (ifso equipped)Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position, and push in the button toactivate the air conditioner. When the air condi-tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functionsare added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

CoolingThis mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.


2. Turn the air flow control dial to the MAX A/Cor position.


4. Push the button. The indicator lightcomes on.



● For quick cooling when the outside tem-perature is high, push the button tothe on position (indicator light on). Be sureto return the button to the off positionfor normal cooling. MAX A/C may be usedfor quick cooling.

Dehumidified heatingThis mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.






Dehumidified defoggingThis mode is used to defog the windows anddehumidify the air.




When the or position is selected,the air conditioner automatically turns on (how-ever, the indicator light will not illuminate). In thisposition, the A/C cannot be turned off. When theair flow control is turned to any position other

than or the A/C light will illuminate(the A/C will continue operating) and can beturned off using the A/C button. This dehumidi-fies the air which helps defog the windshield.The mode automatically turns off, allowingoutside air to be drawn into the passenger com-partment to further improve the defogging perfor-mance.


Operating tips

● Keep the windows and moonroof closedwhile the air conditioner is in operation.

● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3minutes with the windows open to vent hotair from the passenger compartment. Then,close the windows. This allows the air con-ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

● The air conditioning system should beoperated for approximately 10 minutesat least once a month. This helps pre-vent damage to the system due to lackof lubrication.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from thevents in hot, humid conditions as the air iscooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-function.

● If the engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, turnthe air conditioner off. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button and dialpositions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,cooling or defrosting. The air recirculationbutton should always be in the OFF posi-tion for heating and defrosting.


WHA1116 WHA1117


WHA1118 WHA1119


WHA1121


The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed withthe environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’sozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricantswill cause severe damage to your air conditionersystem. See “Air conditioner system refrigerantand oil recommendations” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-mentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidpersonal injury, any air conditioner ser-vice should be done only by an experi-enced technician with proper equipment.

RADIO

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and press the POWER/VOLUME con-trol knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to theradio with the engine not running, the ignitionswitch should be placed in the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter, build-ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-ences. Intermittent changes in reception qualitynormally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-dio reception. These circuits are designed toextend reception range, and to enhance the qual-ity of that reception.

However, there are some general characteristicsof both FM and AM radio signals that can affectradio reception quality in a moving vehicle, evenwhen the finest equipment is used. These char-acteristics are completely normal in a given re-ception area and do not indicate any malfunctionin your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be-cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,signal distance and interference from other ve-hicles can work against ideal reception. De-scribed below are some of the factors that canaffect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise to comefrom the audio system speakers. Storing the de-vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-nate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTIONRange: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FMhaving slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-nal influences may sometimes interfere with FMstation reception even if the FM station is within25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal isdirectly related to the distance between thetransmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-acteristics as light. For example, they will reflectoff objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away froma station transmitter, the signals will tend to fadeand/or drift.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER (if soequipped)

AUDIO SYSTEM


Static and flutter: During signal interference frombuildings, large hills or due to antenna position(usually in conjunction with increased distancefrom the station transmitter), static or flutter canbe heard. This can be reduced by adjusting thetreble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflectivecharacteristics of FM signals, direct and reflectedsignals reach the receiver at the same time. Thesignals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTIONAM signals, because of their low frequency, canbend around objects and skip along the ground.In addition, the signals can be bounced off theionosphere and bent back to earth. Because ofthese characteristics, AM signals are also sub-ject to interference as they travel from transmitterto receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areas withmany tall buildings. It can also occur for severalseconds during ionospheric turbulence even inareas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricalpower lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if soequipped)When the satellite radio is used for the first timeor the battery has been replaced, the satelliteradio may not work properly. This is not a mal-function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satelliteradio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal orlarge building for satellite radio to receive all ofthe necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available when theRADIO button is pressed to access satellite radiostations unless optional satellite receiver and an-tenna are installed and an XM� satellite radioservice subscription is active. Satellite radio isnot available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected ifcargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radiosignal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satelliteantenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna canaffect satellite radio performance. Remove theice to restore satellite radio reception. AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

LHA0099


Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

● Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD player.

● Trying to load a CD with the CD doorclosed could damage the CD and/or CDplayer.

● Only one CD can be loaded into the CDplayer at a time.

● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACTdisc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the discor packaging.

● During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

● The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

● The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the compartment tempera-ture is extremely high or low.Decrease/increase the temperaturebefore use.

● Do not expose the CD to direct sun-light.

● CDs that are in poor condition or aredirty, scratched or covered with finger-prints may not work properly.

● The following CDs may not work prop-erly:

● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

● Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

● CDs that are not round

● CDs with a paper label

● CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges

● This audio system can only play pre-recorded CDs. It has no capability torecord or burn CDs.

● If the CD cannot be played, one of thefollowing messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-rectly (the label side is facing up,etc.).

● Confirm that the CD is not bent orwarped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tem-perature inside the player. Remove theCD by pressing the EJECT button. Aftera short time, reinsert the CD. The CDcan be played when the temperature ofthe player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-tem (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)CD).


Compact disc with MP3 or WMA (ifso equipped)

Terms:

● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving PicturesExperts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is themost well-known compressed digital audiofile format. This format allows for near “CDquality” sound, but at a fraction of the size ofnormal audio files. MP3 conversion of anaudio track from CD-ROM can reduce thefile size by approximately a 10:1 ratio withvirtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3compression removes the redundant andirrelevant parts of a sound signal that thehuman ear doesn’t hear.

● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is acompressed audio format created by Mi-crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMAcodec offers greater file compression thanthe MP3 codec, enabling storage of moredigital audio tracks in the same amount ofspace when compared to MP3s at the samelevel of quality.

● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number ofbits per second used by a digital music file.The size and quality of a compressed digitalaudio file is determined by the bit rate usedwhen encoding the file.

● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequencyis the rate at which the samples of a signalare converted from analog to digital (A/Dconversion) per second.

● Multisession — Multisession is one of themethods for writing data to media. Writingdata once to the media is called a singlesession, and writing more than once is calleda multisession.

● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is thepart of the encoded MP3 or WMA file thatcontains information about the digital musicfile such as song title, artist, encoding bitrate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-mation is displayed on the Artist/song titleline on the display.

* Windows� and Windows Media� are regis-tered trademarks and trademarks in the UnitedStates of America and other countries of Mi-crosoft Corporation of the USA.

Playback order:

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMAfiles is as illustrated.

● The names of folders not containing MP3 orWMA files are not shown in the display.

Playback order chartWHA1078


● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,“Root Folder” is displayed.

● The playback order is the order in which thefiles were written by the writing software.Therefore, the files might not play in thedesired order.


Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RWSupported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Supportedversions*1

MP3Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHzBit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHzBit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*201: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.


Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters forfolder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound qualityCheck if the disc is scratched or dirty.Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long timebefore the music startsplaying.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skipsThe writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match thespecifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit ratefiles

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to thenext song when playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, therewill be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back inthe desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.


Universal Serial Bus (USB) memory (ifso equipped)

This system supports various USB memorysticks, USB hard drives and iPod� players. Thereare some USB devices which may not be sup-ported with this system.

● Make sure that the USB device is connectedcorrectly into the USB connector.

● Do not force the memory stick or USB cableinto the USB connector.

● During cold weather or rainy days, the playermay malfunction due to the humidity. If thisoccurs, remove the USB memory stick anddehumidify or ventilate the player com-pletely.

● The player sometimes cannot function whenthe passenger compartment temperature isextremely high. Decrease the temperaturebefore use.

● Do not leave the USB memory in a placeprone to static electricity or where the airconditioner blows directly. The data in theUSB memory may be damaged.

● Prepare the USB device by yourself be-cause it is not equipped with the vehicle.

● The USB device cannot be formatted withthis system. If you want to format the USBmemory, use your personal computer.

● Partitioned USB devices may not be playedcorrectly.

● Some characters used in other languages(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayedproperly on the vehicle center screen.NISSAN recommends using English lan-guage characters with USB devices.

● Do not connect the USB device if the con-nector or cable is wet. Allow the cableand/or connectors to dry completely beforeconnecting the USB device.

● Large video podcast files cause slow re-sponses in the iPod�. The vehicle centerdisplay may momentarily black out, but it willsoon recover.

● If the iPod� automatically selects large videopodcast files while in the shuffle mode, thevehicle center display may momentarilyblack out, but it will soon recover.

● Audiobooks may not play in the same orderas they appear on the iPod�.

● The iPod� nano (1st Generation) may re-main in fast forward or rewind mode if it isconnected during a seek operation. In thiscase, please manually reset the iPod�.

● The iPod� nano (2nd Generation) will con-tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon-nected during a seek operation.

● An incorrect song title may appear when thePlay Mode is changed while using the iPod�nano (2nd generation).

● If you are using an iPod� (3rd Generationwith Dock connector), do not use very longnames for the song title, album name or artistname to avoid the iPod� resetting itself.

iPod� is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered inthe U.S. and other countries.

iPod�* player (if so equipped)

● Some characters used in other languages(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayedproperly on the vehicle center screen. Werecommend using English language charac-ters with an iPod�.

● Large video podcast files cause slow re-sponses in the iPod�. The vehicle centerdisplay may momentarily black out, but it willsoon recover.


● If the iPod� automatically selects large videopodcast files while in the shuffle mode, thevehicle center display may momentarilyblack out, but it will soon recover.

● Improperly plugging in the iPod� may causea checkmark to be displayed on and off(flickering). Always make sure that the iPod�is connected properly.

● The iPod� nano (2nd Generation) will con-tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon-nected during a seek operation.

● An incorrect song title may appear when thePlay Mode is changed while using the iPod�nano (2nd Generation).

● Audiobooks may not play in the same orderas they appear on the iPod�.

● The iPod� nano (1st Generation) may re-main in fast forward or rewind mode if it isconnected during a seek operation. In thiscase, please manually reset the iPod�.

● If you are using an iPod� (3rd Generationwith Dock connector), do not use very longnames for the song title, album name or artistname to prevent the iPod� from resettingitself.

● Be careful not to do the following, or thecable could be damaged and a loss of func-tion may occur:

● Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in (40mm) radius maximum).

● Twist the cable excessively (more than180 degrees).

● Pull or drop the cable.

● Close the center console lid on the cableor connectors.

● Store objects with sharp edges in thestorage where the cable is stored.

● Spill liquids on the cable and connectors.

● Do not connect the cable to the iPod� if thecable and/or connectors are wet. It maydamage the iPod�.

● If the cable and connectors are exposed towater, allow the cable and/or connectors todry completely before connecting the cableto the iPod� (wait 24 hours for it to dry).

● If the connector is exposed to fluids otherthan water, evaporative residue may cause ashort between the connector pins. In thiscase, replace the cable, otherwise damageto the iPod� and a loss of function mayoccur.

● If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, con-nectors cracked, contamination such as liq-uids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connectors), donot use the cable and contact a NISSANdealer to replace the cable with a new one.

● When not in use for extended periods oftime, store the cable in a clean, dust freeenvironment at room temperature and with-out direct sun exposure.

● Do not use the cable for any other purposesother than its intended use in the vehicle.

*iPod� is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered inthe U.S. and other countries.


1. FM-AM button2. CD eject button3. SEEK button4. CD button5. CD insert slot

6. AUX button7. TUNE button8. MENU button9. RPT button10. AUX IN jack

11. VOLUME control knob12. PWR button13. SCAN button14. RDM button15. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACTDISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A) (if soequipped)

For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-tion precautions” in this section.

Audio main operation

POWER/VOLUME control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition. Press the PWR button while the systemis off to call up the mode (radio, CD or AUX) thatwas playing immediately before the system wasturned off. While the system is on, pressing thePWR button turns the system off.

Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.

MENU button (Bass, Treble, Fade, Balanceand Clock):

Press the MENU button to change the mode asfollows:

BAS (Bass) → TRE (Treble) → FAD (Fade) →BAL (Balance) → Clock → Normal mode

Type ALHA1224


Press the SEEK or or TUNEor button to adjust the Bass, Treble, Fadeand Balance to the desired level. Fade adjuststhe sound level between the front and rear speak-ers and Balance adjusts the sound between theright and left speakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the MENU button repeatedlyuntil the radio or CD display reappears. If noaction is taken, the radio or CD display will auto-matically reappear after approximately 10 sec-onds.

Clock set

If the clock is not displayed with the ignitionswitch in the ACC or ON position, you need toselect the CLK-ON mode. Press the MENU but-ton repeatedly until CLK-OFF mode is displayed.Use the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button to en-able CLK-ON mode.

1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until“Clock:” appears. The hours will begin flash-ing.

2. Press the SEEK button or or

the TUNE button or to adjustthe hours.

3. Press the MENU button again. The minuteswill begin flashing.

4. Press the SEEK button or or

the TUNE button or to adjustthe minutes.

5. Press the MENU button again to exit theclock set mode.

If no action is taken, the display will return to theregular clock display after 10 seconds.

FM/AM radio operation

FM·AM button:

Press the FM·AM button to change the band asfollows:

AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM

If another audio source is playing when theFM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-ing will automatically be turned off and the lastradio station played will begin playing.

The FM stereo indicator (ST) illuminates duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio automatically changesfrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE button (Tuning):

Press the TUNE button or formanual tuning.

SEEK tuning:

Press the SEEK button or to tunefrom low to high or high to low frequencies and tostop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning:

Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-casting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the but-ton again during this 5 second period will stopSCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned tothat station. If the SCAN button is not pressedwithin 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to thenext station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations:

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 forFM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set forthe AM band.

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2using the AM·FM select button.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual,SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold anyof the desired station memory buttons (1 –6) until a beep sound is heard.

3. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Programming is nowcomplete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.


If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and carefully insert the compact discinto the slot with the label side up. The compactdisc is automatically pulled into the slot and startsto play.

If the radio is already operating, it automaticallyturns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with the systemoff and the compact disc loaded, the system willturn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with a compactdisc loaded and the radio playing, the radio willautomatically be turned off and the compact discwill start to play.

TUNE (Rewind or Fast

Forward) button:

When the TUNE button or ispressed while the compact disc is playing, thecompact disc plays at an increased speed while

reversing or fast forwarding. When the button isreleased, the compact disc returns to normal playspeed.

SEEK button:

When the SEEK button is pressed whilethe compact disc is playing, the next track follow-ing the present one starts to play from the begin-ning. Press the SEEK button several timesto skip several tracks. Each time the button ispressed, the CD advances one additional track.The track number appears in the display window.(When the last track on the compact disc isskipped, the first track is played.)

When the SEEK button is pressed, thetrack being played returns to the beginning.Press the SEEK button several times toskip back several tracks. Each time the button ispressed the CD moves back one track.

RDM button:

When the RDM button is pressed while a com-pact disc is playing, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

1 CD RDM ←→ 1 CD RPT

1 CD RDM: all tracks on the disc will be playedrandomly.

1 CD RPT: play pattern returns to normal.

RPT button:

When the RPT button is pressed while a com-pact disc is playing, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

1 TR RPT ←→ 1 CD RPT

1 TR RPT: the current track will be repeated.

1 CD RPT: play pattern returns to normal.

AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX IN jack is located on the front of theradio. The AUX IN audio input jack accepts anystandard analog audio input such as from a por-table cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or alaptop computer.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible devicewhen it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.

EJECT button:

When the button is pressed with a com-pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject andthe last source will be played.

When the button is pressed twice with acompact disc loaded, the compact disc will beejected further for easier CD removal. If the discis not removed within 15 seconds, the disc willreload.


1. MUTE button2. DISP/TEXT button3. FM-AM button4. CD button5. CD insert slot

6. iPod button7. AUX button8. CLOCK button9. CD eject button10. TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button

11. SCAN/RPT button12. AUDIO button13. AUX IN jack14. Station select (1 - 6) buttons15. VOLUME control knob16. PWR button17. iPod MENU button18. BACK button19. ENTER button20. SEEK/TRACK button

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACTDISC (CD) PLAYER (Type B) (if soequipped)

For all operation precautions, see �Audio opera-tion precautions� in this section.


POWER/VOLUME control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition. Press the PWR button while the systemis off to call up the mode (radio, CD or AUX) thatwas playing immediately before the system wasturned off. While the system is on, pressing thePWR button turns the system off.

Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.

Type BLHA1225


MUTE button:

Press the button to mute the audio sound.

Press the button again to resume playingthe audio at its previous volume.

AUDIO button (Bass, Treble, Fade, Bal-ance, SSV, Beep):

Press the AUDIO button to change the mode asfollows:

Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance → SpeedSensitive Volume (SSV) → Beep ON/OFF →Normal mode

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, pressthe AUDIO button until the desired mode ap-pears in the display. Press the TUNE

or or SEEK or button to ad-just the selected mode to the desired level. Fadeadjusts the sound level between the front andrear speakers and Balance adjusts the soundbetween the right and left speakers.

To change the Beep to ON or OFF, press theTUNE button up or down until the desired modeis displayed. This will enable or disable the beepsound heard during menu selection.

To change the Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)mode to OFF, LOW, MID or HIGH, press the

TUNE button or until the desiredsetting is displayed.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedlyuntil the radio or CD display reappears. If noaction is taken, the radio or CD display will auto-matically reappear after approximately 5 sec-onds.

Clock set

If the clock is not displayed with the ignitionswitch in the ACC or ON position, you need toselect the CLK-ON mode. Press the MENU but-ton repeatedly until CLK-OFF mode is displayed.Use the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button to en-able CLK-ON mode.

1. Press and hold the CLOCK button until theclock display starts to flash.

2. Press the SEEK/TRACK buttonor to adjust the hours.

3. Press the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER

button or to adjust the minutes.

4. Press the CLOCK button again to exit theclock set mode.

If no action is taken, the display will return to theregular clock display after 10 seconds.

DISP (display) button

This button works during FM, CD and iPod�operation. See the detailed function for this but-ton in the section for each mode.

iPOD� MENU, ENTER and BACK buttons

These buttons can only be used for iPod� opera-tions. See “iPod� player operation without Navi-gation System (Type A)” in this section for detailsabout the functions of these buttons.

FM/AM radio operation

FM·AM button:




The FM stereo indicator (ST) illuminates duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio automatically changesfrom stereo to monaural reception.


TUNE button (Tuning):

Press the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER

button or for manual tuning.

SEEK tuning:

Press the SEEK/TRACK button orto tune from low to high or high to low frequen-cies and to stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning:

Press the SCAN/RPT button to stop at eachbroadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pressing thebutton again during this 5 second period will stopSCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned tothat station. If the SCAN/RPT button is notpressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning movesto the next station.



1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2using the AM·FM select button.



4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-ner.


DISP/TEXT button:

When the DISP/TEXT button is pressed while inFM radio mode, the radio display will change asfollows:

Frequency → PTY → PS → Frequency

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and carefully insert the compact discinto the slot with the label side up. The compactdisc is automatically pulled into the slot and startsto play.


CD button:



DISP/TEXT button:

When the DISP/TEXT button is pressed while aCD is playing, the display will change as follows:

CD:

Track number → Disc title → Song title → Tracknumber

CD with MP3 or WMA:

Track number → Folder title → Album title →Artist → Song title → Track number

TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER

(Reverse or Fast Forward)

button:

CD:

When the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER

button (fast forward) or (reverse) ispressed while the compact disc is playing, thecompact disc plays at an increased speed whilereversing or fast forwarding. When the button isreleased, the compact disc returns to normal playspeed.


CD with MP3 or WMA:

When the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button

(fast forward) or (reverse) ispressed for less than 1.5 seconds while thecompact disc is playing, the folders in the CD willchange.

When the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button

(fast forward) or (reverse) ispressed for more than 1.5 seconds while thecompact disc is playing, the compact disc playsat an increased speed while reversing or fastforwarding. When the button is released, thecompact disc returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/TRACK button:

When the SEEK/TRACK button ispressed while the compact disc is playing, thenext track following the present one starts to playfrom the beginning. Press the SEEK/TRACKbutton several times to skip several tracks.Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-vances one additional track. The track numberappears in the display window. (When the lasttrack on the compact disc is skipped, the firsttrack is played.)

When the SEEK/TRACK button ispressed, the track being played returns to the

beginning. Press the SEEK/TRACKbutton several times to skip back severaltracks. Each time the button is pressed the CDmoves back one track.

SCAN/RPT button:

When the SCAN/RPT button is pressed while acompact disc is playing, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

CD:

REPEAT TRACK → RANDOM TRACK → RE-PEAT DISC

CD with MP3 or WMA:

REPEAT FOLDER → REPEAT TRACK → RAN-DOM TRACK → RANDOM FOLDER → REPEATDISC

REPEAT TRACK: the current track will be re-peated.

RANDOM TRACK: all tracks on the disc will beplayed randomly.

REPEAT DISC: play pattern returns to normal.

REPEAT FOLDER: the current folder will be re-peated.

RANDOM FOLDER: all tracks in the currentfolder will be played randomly.

AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX IN jack is located on the front of theradio. The AUX IN audio input jack accepts anystandard analog audio input such as from a por-table cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or alaptop computer.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible devicewhen it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.

EJECT button:




1. SCAN button2. Station select (1 - 6) buttons3. CD insert slot4. iPod MENU button5. CD eject button

6. TUNE/SCROLL knob/Setting controlbutton

7. SEEK/CAT buttons8. AUX IN jack9. AUX button*

10. CD button11. FM-AM button12. RPT button13. POWER/VOLUME control knob14. RDM button

*No satellite radio reception is availablewhen the AUX button is pressed to ac-cess satellite radio stations unless op-tional satellite receiver and antenna areinstalled and an XM� satellite radio ser-vice subscription is active. Satellite ra-dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaiiand Guam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER(Type A) (if so equipped)

For all operation precautions, see �Audio opera-tion precautions� in this section.

Audio main operationVOL/ON·OFF control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knobwhile the system is off to call up the mode (radioor CD) that was playing immediately before thesystem was turned off.

Type ALHA1269


To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFFcontrol knob.

Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust thevolume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. When this featureis active, the audio volume changes as the drivingspeed changes.

Setting control knob (Audio, Display andClock):

Press the ENTER button to adjust the audio,display and clock settings as follows:

Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance → SpeedSensitive Volume (SSV) (if so equipped) →Brightness → Contrast → On-screen Clock →Clock Adjust → Bass

Once the desired setting is displayed on thescreen, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob left or rightto adjust the chosen setting. Press the ENTERbutton to move to the next setting or wait approxi-mately five seconds to exit the setting adjustmentmode.

Audio settings:

Adjust the bass, treble, fade and balance byselecting the desired setting with the ENTERbutton and then adjusting the level with theTUNE/SCROLL knob. Balance adjusts thesound between the left and right speakers. Fadeadjusts the sound between the front and rearspeakers.

Speed Sensitive Volume (if so equipped):

To change the Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)level from 1 to 5, or to turn the feature off entirely,choose the Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) set-ting with the ENTER button and then adjust thelevel with the TUNE/SCROLL knob. Speed Sen-sitive Volume (SSV) adjusts the volume of theaudio system as the vehicle’s driving speedchanges.

LHA1270 LHA1271


Display settings:

To adjust the brightness or contrast of the displayscreen, press the ENTER button until the chosensetting is displayed. Use the TUNE/SCROLLknob to adjust the display to the desired level.

On-screen Clock:

The clock is shown in the upper right corner ofthe screen. To turn this feature off or to re-enablethe clock display after it has been turned off,press the ENTER button until the On-screenClock mode is displayed. Use theTUNE/SCROLL knob to toggle the feature on oroff.

Clock adjust:

To adjust the time, perform the following steps:

1. Press the ENTER button repeatedly until theClock Adjust mode is displayed on thescreen.

2. The hours will begin blinking. Adjust thehours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL knobleft or right and press the ENTER button.

3. The minutes will begin blinking. Adjust theminutes by turning the TUNE/SCROLL knobleft or right and press the ENTER button.

LHA1272 LHA1273 LHA1274


iPod� MENU button

This button can only be used for iPod� opera-tions. See “iPod� player operation without Navi-gation System (Type B)” in this section for detailsabout the function of this button.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM·AM button:




The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown onthe screen during FM stereo reception. When thestereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto-matically changes from stereo to monaural re-ception.

SAT band select:

Pressing the AUX button will change the band asfollows:

AUX → XM1* → XM2* → AUX (satellite, if soequipped)

When the AUX button is pressed while the igni-tion switch is in the ACC or ON position, theradio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on whenthe VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed to turnthe radio on.

*When the AUX button is pressed, the satelliteradio mode will be skipped unless an optionalsatellite receiver and antenna are installed and anXM� satellite radio service subscription is active.Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaiiand Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the AUX buttonis pressed, the compact disc will automatically beturned off and the last radio station played willcome on.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning):

Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or rightfor manual tuning.

SEEK tuning:

Press the SEEK buttons or to tunefrom low to high or high to low frequencies and tostop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning:

Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-casting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appearon the screen while the radio is scan tuning.

Pressing the button again during this 5 secondperiod will stop SCAN tuning and the radio willremain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button isnot pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuningmoves to the next station.



1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2using the FM·AM select button.






Compact disc (CD) player operationPlace the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and carefully insert the compact discinto the slot with the label side up. The compactdisc is automatically pulled into the slot and startsto play.


CD button:



CD/MP3 display mode:

While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain textmay be displayed on the screen if the CD hasbeen encoded with text information. Dependingon how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, informa-tion such as Artist, Song and Folder will be dis-played.

The track number and the total number of tracksin the current folder or on the current disc aredisplayed on the screen as well. For example, thefirst track out of fourteen total is currently playing.

SEEK/CAT (Reverse or

Fast Forward) buttons:

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttonsor for 1.5 seconds while the compact discis playing to reverse or fast forward the trackbeing played. The compact disc plays at an in-creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.When the button is released, the compact discreturns to normal play speed.

SEEK/CAT buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT button while a CD orMP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the begin-ning of the current track. Press the SEEK/CATbutton several times to skip backward sev-eral tracks.

Press the SEEK/CAT button while a CD orMP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track.Press the SEEK/CAT button several timesto skip forward several tracks. If the last track ona CD is skipped, the first track on the disc isplayed. If the last track in a folder of anMP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first track of thenext folder is played.

LHA1275


TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CDonly):

If an MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is play-ing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to changefolders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back afolder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead afolder.

RPT button:

When the RPT button is pressed while a com-pact disc is playing, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

CD:

1 TRK RPT ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRK RPT → OFF

1 TRK RPT: the current track will be repeated.

1 FOLDER RPT: the current folder will be re-peated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-cator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is displayed onthe screen unless no pattern is applied.

RDM button:

When the RDM button is pressed while a com-pact disc is playing, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

CD:

1 DISC RDM ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 DISC RDM → 1 FOLDER RDM → OFF

1 DISC RDM: all tracks on the disc will be playedrandomly.

1 FOLDER RDM: all tracks in the current folderwill be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. Theindicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is displayed onthe screen unless no pattern is applied.

AUX button:

The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. TheAUX IN audio input jack accepts any standardanalog audio input such as from a portable cas-sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptopcomputer.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible deviceplugged into the AUX IN jack. The AUX button isalso used to switch the audio system to a source

plugged into the USB input jack in the centerconsole. When a device is plugged into the AUXIN jack while another device is plugged into theUSB input jack, the AUX button is used to togglebetween the two functions.

For more information about the USB input jack,see “USB interface” in this section.

EJECT button:



Additional featuresFor more information about the iPod� playeravailable with this system, see “iPod� player op-eration without Navigation System (Type B)” inthis section.

For more information about the USB interfaceavailable with this system, see “USB interface(models without Navigation System)” in this sec-tion.


1. XM button2. CD insert slot3. Display screen4. CD eject button5. SETUP button

6. BACK button7. TUNE/SCROLL knob, AUDIO button8. Station select (1 - 6) buttons9. AUX button10. VOL/ON-OFF control knob

11. SEEK/CATEGORY button12. CD button13. FM-AM button

*No satellite radio reception is availablewhen the XM button is pressed to ac-cess satellite radio stations unless op-tional satellite receiver and antenna areinstalled and an XM� satellite radio ser-vice subscription is active. Satellite ra-dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaiiand Guam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER(Type B) (if so equipped)For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-tion precautions” in this section.

Audio main operationVOL/ON·OFF control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knobwhile the system is off to call up the mode (radio,CD, AUX, USB or iPod�) that was playing imme-diately before the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFFcontrol knob.

Type BLHA1473


Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust thevolume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Vol-ume for audio. When this feature is active, theaudio volume changes as the driving speedchanges.

Audio settings:

Press the SETUP button to display the audiosettings on the screen. These settings can alsobe displayed by pressing the AUDIO button(TUNE/SCROLL knob). Use the touchscreen toadjust the following items to the desired setting:

Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade:Controls the sound of the audio system. Balanceadjusts the sound between the left and rightspeakers. Fade adjusts the sound between thefront and rear speakers.

Speed Volume:Controls the level to which the volume is adjusted

as the vehicle’s driving speed changes. Choose asetting between 1 and 5 or choose 0 to disablethe feature entirely.

AUX Level:Controls the volume level of incoming soundwhen an auxiliary device is connected to thesystem. Available options are Quiet, Medium andLoud.

FM/AM/SAT radio operationFM·AM button:



LHA1486 LHA1487



The FM stereo indicator (ST) is shown on thescreen during FM stereo reception. When thestereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto-matically changes from stereo to monaural re-ception.

XM band select:

Pressing the XM button will change the band asfollows:

XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → XM1* (satellite, if soequipped)

When the XM button is pressed while the ignitionswitch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio willcome on at the last station played.

The last station played will also come on whenthe VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed to turnthe radio on.

*When the XM button is pressed, the satelliteradio mode will be skipped unless an optionalsatellite receiver and antenna are installed and anXM� satellite radio service subscription is active.Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaiiand Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the XM buttonis pressed, the compact disc will automatically beturned off and the last radio station played willcome on.

While the radio is in XM mode, the operation canbe controlled through the touchscreen. Touchthe “Channels” key to display a list of channels.Touch a channel displayed on the list to changeto that channel. Touch the “Categories” key todisplay a list of categories. Touch a categorydisplayed on the list to display options within thatcategory.

LHA1492


Tuning with the touchscreen:

When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be tunedusing the touchscreen. To bring up the visualtuner, touch the “Tune” key on the lower rightcorner of the screen. A screen appears with a barrunning from low frequencies on the left to highfrequencies on the right. Touch the screen at thelocation of the frequency you wish to tune and thestation will change to that frequency. To return tothe regular radio display screen, touch the “OK”key.

Tuning with the TUNE/SCROLL knob:

The radio can also be manually tuned using theTUNE/SCROLL knob. When in FM or AM mode,

turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left for lowerfrequencies or to the right for higher frequencies.When in XM mode, turn the TUNE/SCROLLknob to change the channel.

SEEK tuning:

When in FM or AM mode, press the

SEEK/CATEGORY button or totune from low to high or high to low frequenciesand to stop at the next broadcasting station.

When in XM mode, press the SEEK/CATEGORY

button or to change the category.


Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 forFM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set forthe AM band. Eighteen stations can be set for theXM band (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2using the FM·AM select button or choosethe radio band XM1, XM2 or XM3 using theXM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual orseek tuning. Press and hold any of the de-sired station memory buttons (1 – 6) until abeep sound is heard.




Compact disc (CD) player operationPlace the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and carefully insert the compact discinto the slot with the label side up. The compactdisc is automatically pulled into the slot and startsto play.


CD button:



LHA1489


CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD,certain text may be displayed (when a CD en-coded with text is being used). Depending onhow the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, thetext is displayed listing the artist, album and songtitle.

There are other keys displayed on the screenwhen a CD is playing:

Random:Touch the “Random” key to apply a random playpattern to the CD. When the random mode isactive, the icon will be displayed to the leftof the song title. If an MP3 CD is playing, touch-ing “Random” alternates between randomly play-ing songs within the current folder and songsfrom the CD as a whole. The icon is dis-played to the left of the song title or folder nameto denote which pattern is applied. To cancelRandom mode, touch the “Random” key untilno icon is displayed.

Repeat:Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat playpattern to the CD. When the repeat mode isactive, the icon will be displayed to the leftof the song title. If an MP3 CD is playing, touch-ing “Repeat” alternates between repeating thecurrent song and repeating the current folder.The icon is displayed to the left of the songtitle or folder name to denote which pattern isapplied. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Re-peat” key until no icon is displayed.

LHA1488 LHA1490 LHA1491


Browse:Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles onthe CD in list format. Touch the title of a song inthe list to begin playing that song. If an MP3 CD isplaying, touching the “Browse” key will also listthe folders on the disc. Follow the procedure forselecting a song with the touchscreen to choosea folder.

SEEK/CATEGORY

(Reverse or Fast

Forward) button:

Press and hold the SEEK/CATEGORY

button or for 1.5 seconds while thecompact disc is playing to reverse or fast forwardthe track being played. The compact disc plays atan increased speed while reversing or fast for-warding. When the button is released, the com-pact disc returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/CATEGORY button:

Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button whilea CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to thebeginning of the current track. Press theSEEK/CATEGORY button several timesto skip backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button whilea CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advanceone track. Press the SEEK/CATEGORYbutton several times to skip forward sev-eral tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped, thefirst track on the disc is played. If the last track ina folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the firsttrack of the next folder is played.

AUX button:

The AUX IN jack is located in the center consolenext to the USB jack. The AUX IN audio input jackaccepts any standard analog audio input such asfrom a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3player or a laptop computer.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible deviceplugged into the AUX IN jack. The AUX button isalso used to switch the audio system to a sourceplugged into the USB input jack in the centerconsole. When a device is plugged into the AUXIN jack while another device is plugged into theUSB input jack, the AUX button is used to togglebetween the two functions.

LHA1493


For more information about the USB input jack,see “USB interface” in this section.

EJECT button:



Additional featuresFor more information about the iPod� playeravailable with this system, see “iPod� player op-eration with Navigation System” in this section.

For more information about the USB interfaceavailable with this system, see “USB interface(models with Navigation System)” in this section.

USB INTERFACE (models withoutNavigation System) (if so equipped)

Connecting a device to the USB inputjack

The USB input jack is located in the center con-sole. Open the protective cover �1 on the USBjack, then insert the USB device into the jack �2 .

When a compatible storage device is pluggedinto the jack, compatible audio files on the stor-age device can be played through the vehicle’saudio system.

Audio file operationAUX button:

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACCposition and press the AUX button to switch tothe USB input mode. If another audio source isplugged in through the AUX IN jack on the radio,the AUX button toggles between the twosources.

WHA1358


Play information

Information about the audio files being playedcan be displayed on the display screen of thevehicle’s audio system. Depending on how theaudio files are encoded, information such asFolder, Song and Artist will be displayed.

The track number and number of total tracks inthe folder are displayed on the screen as well. Forexample, the fourth track out of twelve total iscurrently playing.

SEEK/CAT (Reverse or

Fast Forward) buttons:

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttonsor for 1.5 seconds while an audio file onthe USB device is playing to reverse or fastforward the track being played. The track plays atan increased speed while reversing or fast for-warding. When the button is released, the audiofile returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/CAT buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-dio file on the USB device is playing to return tothe beginning of the current track. Press theSEEK/CAT button several times to skipbackward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-dio file on the USB device is playing to advanceone track. Press the SEEK/CAT buttonseveral times to skip forward several tracks. If thelast track in a folder on the USB device isskipped, the first track of the next folder is played.

RDM button:

When the RDM button is pressed while an audiofile on the USB device is playing, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

ALL RDM → 1 FOLDER RDM → OFF

ALL RDM: all tracks on the USB device will beplayed randomly.

1 FOLDER RDM: all tracks in the current folderwill be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. Theindicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device isdisplayed on the screen unless no pattern isapplied.

RPT button:

When the RPT button is pressed while an audiofile on the USB device is playing, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRACK RPT → OFF

1 TRACK RPT: the current track will be repeated.

1 FOLDER RPT: the current folder will be re-peated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-cator on the display will turn off.

LHA1280


The current play pattern of the USB device isdisplayed on the screen unless no pattern isapplied.

TUNE/SCROLL knob:

If there are multiple folders with audio files on theUSB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob tochange folders. Turn the knob to the left to skipback a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skipahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audiofiles on the USB device, turning theTUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will re-turn to the first track on the USB device.

USB INTERFACE (models withNavigation System)

Connecting a device to the USB inputjack

The USB input jack is located in the center con-sole. Open the protective cover �1 on the USBjack, then insert the USB device into the jack.

When a compatible storage device is pluggedinto the jack, compatible audio files on the stor-age device can be played through the vehicle’saudio system.

Audio file operationAUX button:

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACCposition and press the AUX button to switch tothe USB input mode. If another audio source isplaying and a USB memory device is inserted,press the AUX button repeatedly until the centerdisplay changes to the USB memory mode.

If the system has been turned off while the USBmemory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOLcontrol knob to restart the USB memory.

LHA1500


Play information

Information about the audio files being played isshown on the display screen of the vehicle’saudio system. Touch “Browse” to display the listof folders and files on the USB device. Touch thename of a song on the screen to begin playingthat song.


Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button whilean audio file on the USB device is playing toreturn to the beginning of the current track. Pressthe SEEK/CATEGORY button severaltimes to skip backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button whilean audio file on the USB device is playing toadvance one track. Press the SEEK/CATEGORYbutton several times to skip forward sev-eral tracks. If the last track in a folder on the USBdevice is skipped, the first track of the next folderis played.


button or for 1.5 seconds while anaudio file on the USB device is playing to reverseor fast forward the track being played. The trackplays at an increased speed while reversing orfast forwarding. When the button is released, theaudio file returns to normal play speed.

Random and repeat play mode:

While files on a USB device are playing, the playpattern can be altered so that songs are repeatedor played randomly.

Random:Touch the “Random” key to apply a random playpattern to the USB device. When the randommode is active, the icon is displayed to theleft of the song title or album name to denotewhich random pattern is applied. To cancel Ran-dom mode, touch the “Random” key untilno icon is displayed.

Repeat:Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat playpattern to the USB device. When the repeatmode is active, the icon is displayed to theleft of the song title or album name to denotewhich repeat pattern is applied. To cancel Repeatmode, touch the “Repeat” key until no iconis displayed.

LHA1496


iPod�* PLAYER OPERATIONWITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM(Type A) (if so equipped)

Connecting iPod�

The iPod� outlet connector is located on thecenter console. Your vehicle is equipped with thespecialized cable for connecting the iPod� toyour vehicle audio unit. To connect the iPod�, firstopen the protective cover from the connector inthe center console �1 . Next, connect one end ofthe iPod� cable to the iPod� and the other end ofthe cable to the connector in the center console�2 . If compatible, the battery of your iPod� ischarged during the connection to the vehicle.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod� canonly be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

To disconnect the cable from the vehicle outlet,fully depress the center connector button to un-latch the connector and pull the connectorstraight out of the outlet. To disconnect the cablefrom the iPod�, fully depress the side connectorbuttons and pull the iPod� connector straight outof the iPod�.

* iPod� is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered inthe U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

● iPod� Classic - 1st through 6th generation

● iPod� Mini - 1st and 2nd generation

● iPod� Nano - 1st through 3rd generation

● iPod� Touch - 1st generation

● iPhone� - 1st generation

Make sure that your iPod� firmware is updated tothe version indicated above.


iPod� button:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and press the iPod� button to switch tothe iPod� mode.

If another audio source is playing and the iPod� isconnected, press the iPod� button to switch tothe iPod� mode.

If the system is turned off while the iPod� isplaying, the iPod� will start when the PWR buttonis pressed.

Top menu item selecting:

Press the iPod� MENU button while the iPod� isconnected to show the interface for iPod� opera-tion on the audio display. The items can be cho-sen from the menu list screen by pressing the

SEEK button or while the iPod� isoperational. The display pattern can be changedas follows:

Playlists → Artists → Albums → Songs → Pod-casts → Genres → Composers → Audiobooks

For more information about each item, see theiPod� owner’s manual.

WHA1355


ENTER and BACK buttons:

Press the ENTER button while the top menu isdisplayed to show program details on the audio

display. Use the SEEK buttons or toscroll through the choices and press the ENTERbutton to make a selection. Press the BACKbutton to return to the previous display.

iPod� play information:

Press the DISP TEXT button for less than 1.5seconds while a program is playing to change thedisplayed program information as follows:

Excluding Podcast:

Album Title → Artist Name → Song Title →Normal Mode

Podcast:

Album Title → Song Title → Normal Mode

For more information about Podcasts, see theiPod� owner’s manual.

TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button:

When the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button is

pressed or for more than 1.5 sec-onds while the iPod� is playing, the iPod� willplay while fast forwarding or reversing. When thebutton is released, the iPod� will return to thenormal play speed.

When the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button is

pressed or for less than 1.5 sec-onds while the iPod� is playing, the next track orthe beginning of the current track on the iPod�will be played.

SCAN/RPT button:

Press the SCAN/RPT button while a track isplaying to change the play pattern as follows:

Excluding Podcast and Audiobook:

ALL RPT → TRK RPT → ALL RDM → ALBUMRDM

Podcast:

ALL RPT ←→ TRK RPT

For more information about Podcasts, see theiPod� owner’s manual.

Audiobook:

NORMAL → FAST → SLOW

iPod�* PLAYER OPERATIONWITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM(Type B) (if so equipped)

Connecting iPod�

To connect an iPod� to the vehicle so that theiPod� can be controlled with the audio systemcontrols and display screen, use the USB jacklocated in the center console. Open the protec-tive cover �1 on the USB jack in the centerconsole. Then connect the iPod�-specific end ofthe cable to the iPod� and the USB end of thecable to the USB jack �2 on the vehicle. Whenthe ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,

WHA1358


the battery of your iPod� (if compatible) ischarged during the connection to the vehicle.


To disconnect the iPod� from the vehicle, removethe USB end of the cable from the USB jack onthe vehicle, then remove the cable from theiPod�.


Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

● iPod� 5th Generation version 1.2.3

● iPod� Classic - version 1.1

● iPod� Touch - version 2.1*

● iPod� Nano - 1st generation version 1.3.1

● iPod� Nano - 2nd generation version 1.1.3

● iPod� Nano - 3rd generation version 1.0.2

● iPod� Nano - 4th generation version 1.0.4

● iPod� Nano - 5th generation version 1.0.1

* Some features of this iPod� may not be fullyfunctional.



AUX button:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and press the AUX button repeatedlyuntil the iPod� mode is displayed on the screen.

If another audio source is playing and the iPod� isconnected, press the AUX button repeatedly toswitch to the iPod� mode.

If the vehicle audio system is turned off while theiPod� is playing, the iPod� will start when theVOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed.

Interface:

The interface for iPod� operation shown on thevehicle’s audio system display screen is similar tothe iPod� interface. Use the TUNE/SCROLLknob and ENTER button to navigate the menuson the screen. The iPod� MENU button on thevehicle audio system is used to move up one levelin the iPod� menus.

Depending on the iPod� model, the followingitems may be available on the menu list screen.For further information about each item, see theiPod� Owner’s Manual.

● Playlists

● Artists

● Albums

● Songs

● Podcasts

● Genres

● Composers

● Audiobooks

● ShuffleSongs

SEEK/CAT buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT buttons or toskip backward or forward one track.

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttonsor for 1.5 seconds while a track is playingto reverse or fast forward the track being played.The track plays at an increased speed whilereversing or fast forwarding. When the button isreleased, the track returns to normal play speed.

RPT button:

Press the RPT button while a track is playing tochange the play pattern as follows:

1 TRK RPT → ALL RPT → RPT OFF

1 TRK RPT: the current track will be repeated.


ALL RPT: all songs in the current list are re-peated.

RPT OFF: no repeat play pattern is applied.

RDM button:

Press the RDM button while a track is playing tochange the play pattern as follows:

TRK SHUFFLE → ALBUM SHUFFLE →SHUFFLE OFF

TRK SHUFFLE: the tracks in the current list willbe played randomly.

ALBUM SHUFFLE: the albums in the current listwill be played randomly.

SHUFFLE OFF: no random play pattern is ap-plied.

iPod�* PLAYER OPERATION WITHNAVIGATION SYSTEM (if soequipped)

Connecting iPod�

To connect an iPod� to the vehicle so that theiPod� can be controlled with the audio systemcontrols and display screen, use the USB jacklocated in the center console. Open the protec-tive cover on the USB jack in the center consoleand then connect the iPod�-specific end of thecable to the iPod� and the USB end of the cableto the USB jack on the vehicle �1 . If your iPod�supports charging via a USB connection, its bat-

tery will be charged while connected to the ve-hicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition.


To disconnect the iPod� from the vehicle, removethe USB end of the cable from the USB jack onthe vehicle, then remove the cable from theiPod�.


CompatibilityThe following models are compatible:

● iPod� Classic - 5th generation

● iPod� Nano - 1st through 2nd generation


LHA1500


Audio main operationAUX button:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and press the AUX button repeatedlyuntil the iPod� mode is displayed on the screen.

If another audio source is playing and the iPod� isconnected, press the AUX button repeatedly toswitch to the iPod� mode.

If the vehicle audio system is turned off while theiPod� is playing, the iPod� will start when theVOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed.

Interface:

The interface for iPod� operation shown on thevehicle’s audio system display screen is similar tothe iPod� interface. Use the touchscreen,BACK button or the TUNE/SCROLL knob tonavigate the menus on the screen.

When the iPod� is playing, touch the “Menu” keyto bring up the iPod� interface.

Depending on the iPod� model, the followingitems may be available on the menu list screen.For further information about each item, see theiPod� Owner’s Manual.

● Playlists

● Artists

● Albums

● Genres

● Songs

● Composers

● Audiobooks

● Podcasts


Press the SEEK/CATEGORY buttonor to skip backward or forward one track.


button or for 1.5 seconds while atrack is playing to reverse or fast forward the trackbeing played. The track plays at an increasedspeed while reversing or fast forwarding. Whenthe button is released, the track returns to normalplay speed.

Random and repeat play mode:

While the iPod� is playing, the play pattern canbe altered so that songs are repeated or playedrandomly.

LHA1494 LHA1495


Random:Touch the “Random” key to apply a random playpattern to the iPod�. When the random mode isactive, the icon is displayed to the left ofthe song title or album name to denote whichrandom pattern is applied. To cancel Randommode, touch the “Random” key until noicon is displayed.

Repeat:Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat playpattern to the iPod�. When the repeat mode isactive, the icon is displayed to the left ofthe song title or album name to denote whichrepeat pattern is applied. To cancel Repeatmode, touch the “Repeat” key until no iconis displayed. CD CARE AND CLEANING

● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend thedisc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

● Always place the discs in the storage casewhen they are not being used.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from thecenter to the outer edge using a clean, softcloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circularmotion.

● Do not use a conventional record cleaner oralcohol intended for industrial use.

● A new disc may be rough on the inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edges byrubbing the inner and outer edges with theside of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

LHA0049


1. Tuning switch2. MODE select switch3. POWER on/off switch4. Volume control switch

1. Tuning switch2. Phone operation switch3. POWER on and MODE select switch4. Volume control switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)

The audio system can be operated using thecontrols on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switch

If you have the Type A switch, with the ignitionswitch placed in the ACC or ON position, pushthe POWER switch to turn the audio system onor off.

If you have the Type B switch, with the ignitionswitch placed in the ACC or ON position, pushthe MODE switch to turn the audio system on.

MODE select switch (models withoutNavigation System)

Push the MODE select switch to change themode in the following sequence:

AM → FM* → SAT** (if so equipped) → CD*** →USB/iPod*** (if so equipped) → AUX*** → AM

* When using the MODE switch, the audio modeswitches to the FM preset bank (FM1 or FM2)that was last active. To switch between the FM1and FM2 preset banks, use the controls on theaudio system.

** When using the MODE switch, the audio modeswitches to the XM preset bank (XM1 or XM2)that was last active. To switch between the XM1and XM2 preset banks, use the controls on theaudio system.

*** These modes are only available when compat-ible media is connected to the system.

Type ALHA0692

Type BWHA0693


MODE select switch (models withNavigation System)

Push the MODE select switch to change themode in the following sequence:

AM/FM* → XM** → CD*** → USB/AUX*** →AM/FM*

* When using the MODE switch, the audio modeswitches to the preset bank (AM, FM1 or FM2)that was last active. To switch between the AM,FM1 and FM2 preset banks, use the controls onthe audio system.

** When using the MODE switch, the audio modeswitches to the XM preset bank (XM1, XM2 orXM3) that was last active. To switch between theXM preset banks, use the controls on the audiosystem.

*** These modes are only available when compat-ible media is connected to the system.

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch up or down toincrease or decrease the volume.

Tuning

Memory change (radio):

Push the tuning switch ( or ) for lessthan 1.5 seconds to change presets.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch ( or ) for morethan 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previousradio station.

Next/Previous track (CD):

Push the tuning switch or for lessthan 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of thepresent track or skip to the next track. Pushseveral times to skip back or skip through tracks.

ANTENNAThe antenna cannot be shortened, but can beremoved. When you need to remove the antenna,turn the antenna rod counterclockwise �B .

To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna rodclockwise �A and hand tighten.

CAUTION

Always properly tighten the antenna rodduring installation or the antenna rod maybreak during vehicle operation.

LHA0709


When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone inyour NISSAN, be sure to observe the followingprecautions; otherwise, the new equipment mayadversely affect the engine control system andother electronic parts.

WARNING

● A cellular telephone should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation. Some juris-dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-phones while driving.

● If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-lar phone operational mode (if soequipped) is highly recommended. Ex-ercise extreme caution at all times sofull attention may be given to vehicleoperation.

● If you are unable to devote full attentionto vehicle operation while talking onthe phone, pull off the road to a safelocation and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the electronic controlmodules.

● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electronic con-trol system harnesses. Do not route theantenna wire next to any harness.

● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratioas recommended by the manufacturer.

● Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

● Use a phone after stopping your vehiclein a safe location. If you have to use aphone while driving, exercise extremecaution at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

● If you are unable to devote full attentionto vehicle operation while talking onthe phone, pull off the road to a safelocation and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,use a phone after starting the engine.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH� HANDS-FREE PHONESYSTEM (if so equipped)


Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-patible Bluetooth� enabled cellular phone, youcan set up the wireless connection between yourcellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.With Bluetooth� wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call withyour cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to thein-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-necting procedure is required. Your phone isautomatically connected with the in-vehicle

phone module when the ignition switch is placedin the ON position with the previously connectedcellular phone turned on and carried in the ve-hicle.

You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth�cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.However, you can talk on only one cellular phoneat a time.

Before using the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem, refer to the following notes.

● Set up the wireless connection between acellular phone and the in-vehicle phonemodule before using the hands-free phonesystem.

● Some Bluetooth� enabled cellular phonesmay not be recognized by the in-vehiclephone module. Please visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-mended phone list and connecting instruc-tions.

● You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-vice area.

WHA1356


– Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive a cellular signal; suchas in a tunnel, in an underground parkinggarage, near a tall building or in a moun-tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent itfrom being dialed.

● When the radio wave condition is not idealor ambient sound is too loud, it may bedifficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-ing a call.

● Do not place the cellular phone in an areasurrounded by metal or far away from thein-vehicle phone module to prevent tonequality degradation and wireless connectiondisruption.

● While a cellular phone is connected throughthe Bluetooth� wireless connection, the bat-tery power of the cellular phone may dis-charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System cannot chargecellular phones.

● If the hands-free phone system seems to bemalfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”later in this section. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-shooting help.

● Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise tocome from the audio system speakers. Stor-ing the device in a different location mayreduce or eliminate the noise.

● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manualregarding the telephone charges, cellularphone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance withFCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only thesupplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,modification, or attachments could damagethe transmitter and may violate FCC regula-tions.

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,including interference that may cause un-desired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-quirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH� is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.,U.S.A. and licensedto Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allowshands-free operation of the Bluetooth� PhoneSystem.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands maynot be available so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,which takes a few seconds. If the button ispressed before the initialization completes, thesystem will announce “Hands-free phone systemnot ready” and will not react to voice commands.


Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSANVoice Recognition system, observe the following:

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet aspossible. Close the windows to eliminatesurrounding noises (traffic noises, vibrationsounds, etc.), which may prevent the systemfrom recognizing voice commands correctly.

● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking acommand. Otherwise, the command will notbe received properly.

● Start speaking a command within 5 secondsafter the tone sounds.

● Speak in a natural voice without pausingbetween words.

Giving voice commandsTo operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, pressand release the button located on thesteering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak acommand.

The command given is picked up by the micro-phone, and voice feedback is given when thecommand is accepted.

● If you need to hear the available commandsfor the current menu again, say “Help” andthe system will repeat them.

● If a command is not recognized, the systemannounces, “Command not recognized.Please try again.” Repeat the command in aclear voice.

● If you want to go back to the previous com-mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-tion” any time the system is waiting for aresponse.

● You can cancel a command when the sys-tem is waiting for a response by saying,“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You canalso press and hold the button on thesteering wheel for 5 seconds at any time toend the VR session. Whenever the VR ses-sion is cancelled, a double beep is played toindicate you have exited the system.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the voicefeedback, press the volume control switches(+ or -) on the steering wheel while beingprovided with feedback. You can also usethe radio volume control knob.

● In most cases you can interrupt the voicefeedback to speak the next command bypressing the button on the steeringwheel.

● To use the system faster, you may speak thesecond level commands with the main menucommand on the main menu. For example,press the button and after the tonesay, “Call Redial.”

NOTE:

The combined command of Call and (aName) cannot be used.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certainway to speak numbers in voice commands. Referto the following rules and examples.

● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight oh oh six six two six two ohoh”, or

– “One eight zero zero six six two six two ohoh”

● Words can be used for the first 4 digitsplaces only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight hundred six six two six two ohoh”,


– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixtytwo hundred,” and

– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty twohundred”

● Numbers can be spoken in small groups.The system will prompt you to continue en-tering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

– “six six two”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

– “six two zero zero”

● Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-able when using the “Special number” com-mand and the “Send” command during acall).

See “List of voice commands” and “Specialnumber” in this section for more information.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

– “One five five five one two one two starone two three”

● Say “plus” for “+” (available only when usingthe “Special Dialing” command).

● Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (availableonly when storing a phone book number).

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers assingle digits.

The voice command “Help” is available at anytime. Please use the “Help” command to getinformation on how to use the system.

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System are located on the steeringwheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to initiate aVR session or answer an incomingcall.

LHA0707


You can also use the buttonto interrupt the system feedbackand give a command at once. See“List of voice commands” and“During a call” in this section formore information.

PHONE/ENDWhile the voice recognition systemis active, press and hold thebutton for 5 seconds to quit thevoice recognition system at anytime.

TUNING SWITCHWhile using the voice recognitionsystem, tilt the tuning switch up ordown to manually control thephone system.

GETTING STARTED

The following procedures will help you getstarted using the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-ditional command options, refer to “List of voicecommands” in this section.

Choosing a language

You can interact with the Bluetooth� Hands-FreePhone System using English, Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the following.

1. Press and hold the button for morethan 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for thehands-free phone system to enter thespeaker adaptation mode or press thePHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-ferent language.”

3. Press the button.

For information on speaker adaptation, see“Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode” in this sec-tion.

4. The system announces the current languageand gives you the option to change the lan-guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (inFrench). To select the current language,press the PHONE/SEND ( ) button. Toselect a different language, tilt the tuning

switch ( or ) up or down.

NOTE:

You must press the button within 5seconds to change the language.

5. If you decide not to change the language, donot press either button. After 5 seconds, theVR session will end, and the language willnot be changed.

Connecting procedure

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-formed when the vehicle is stationary. If thevehicle starts moving during the procedure,the procedure will be cancelled.

Main Menu

“Connect phone” �A

“Add phone” �B

Initiate from handset �C

Name phone �D

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel. The system announces the availablecommands.

2. Say: “Connect phone” �A . The system ac-knowledges the command and announcesthe next set of available commands.


3. Say: “Add phone” �B . The system acknowl-edges the command and asks you to initiateconnecting from the phone handset �C .

The connecting procedure of the cellularphone varies according to each cellularphone model. See the cellular phone Own-er’s Manual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-tions on connecting NISSAN recommendedcellular phones.

When prompted for a Passkey code, enter“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN andcannot be changed.

4. The system asks you to say a name for thephone �D .

If the name is too long or too short, thesystem tells you, then prompts you for aname again.

Also, if more than one phone is connectedand the name sounds too much like a namealready used, the system tells you, thenprompts you for a name again.

Making a call by entering a phonenumber

Main Menu

“Call” �A

“Phone Number” �B

Speak the digits �C

“Dial” �D

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel. A tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” �A . The system acknowledgesthe command and announces the next set ofavailable commands.

Say: “Special Dialing” to dial more than 10digits or any special characters.

3. Say “Phone Number” �B . The system ac-knowledges the command and announcesthe next set of available commands.

4. Say the number you wish to call starting withthe area code in single digit format �C . If thesystem has trouble recognizing the correctphone number, try entering the number inthe following groups: 3-digit area code,3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “fivefive five” as the 1st group, then “one twoone” as the 2nd group, and “three three five

four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than10 digits or any special characters, say“Special Dialing”. See “How to say num-bers” in this section for more information.

5. When you have finished speaking the phonenumber, the system repeats it back and an-nounces the available commands.

6. Say: “Dial” �D . The system acknowledgesthe command and makes the call.

For additional command options, see “List ofvoice commands” in this section.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ring tone, press thebutton on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the buttonon the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when youhear the ring tone, press the buttonon the steering wheel.

For additional command options, see “List ofvoice commands” later in this section.


LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

Main Menu

“Call”

“Phonebook”

“Recent Calls”

“Connect Phone”

When you press and release the button onthe steering wheel, you can choose from thecommands on the Main Menu. The followingpages describe these commands and the com-mands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone beforespeaking.

After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hearthe list of commands currently available any timethe system is waiting for a response.

If you want to end an action without completing it,you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time thesystem is waiting for a response. The system willend the VR session. Whenever the VR session iscancelled, a double beep is played to indicateyou have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command,you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any timethe system is waiting for a response.

“Call”

Main Menu

“Call”

(Speak name) �A

“Phone Number”

(Speak Digits) �B

“Special Number” �C

“Redial” �D

“Call Back” �E

(Speak name) �A

If you have stored entries in the phonebook, youcan dial a number associated with a name andlocation.

See “Phonebook” in this section to learn how tostore entries.

When prompted by the system, say the name ofthe phone book entry you wish to call. The systemacknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated with thename, the system asks you to choose the loca-tion.

Once you have confirmed the name and location,the system begins the call.

(Speak Digits) �B

When prompted by the system, say the numberyou wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”and “Making a call by entering a phone number”in this section for more details.

“Special Number” �C

For dialing more than 10 digits or any specialcharacters, say “Special Number”. When thesystem acknowledges the command, the systemwill prompt you to speak the number.

“Redial” �D

Use the Redial command to call the last numberthat was dialed.

The system acknowledges the command, re-peats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the systemannounces, “There is no number to redial” andends the VR session.

“Call back” �E

Use the Call Back command to dial the number ofthe last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re-peats the number and begins dialing.


If a call back number does not exist, the systemannounces, “There is no number to call back”andends the VR session.

During a call

During a call there are several command optionsavailable. Press the button on the steeringwheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-mands.

● “Help” — The system announces the avail-able commands.

● “Go back/Correction” — The system an-nounces “Go back,” ends the VR sessionand returns to the call.

● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returnsto the call.

● “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Sendcommand to enter numbers, “*” or “#” duringa call. For example, if you were directed todial an extension by an automated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the commandand sends the tones associated with thenumbers. The system then ends the VR ses-sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,Say “pound” for “#”.

● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System to the cellularphone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Calltransferred to privacy mode.” The systemthen ends the VR session.

To reconnect the call from the cellular phoneto the Bluetooth� Hands-Free System,press the button.

● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to muteyour voice so the other party cannot hear it.Use the mute command again to unmuteyour voice.

NOTE:

If a call is ended or the cellular phonenetwork connection is lost while the Mutefeature is on, the Mute feature will be resetto “off” for the next call so the other partycan hear your voice.

“Phonebook” (phones withoutautomatic phonebook downloadfunction)

NOTE:

The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-able when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phonebook”

“Transfer Entry” �A

“Delete Entry” �B

“List Names” �C

For phones that do not support automatic down-load of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth� pro-file), the “Phonebook”command is used to manu-ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook.

The phonebook stores up to 40 names for eachphone connected to the system.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone-book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-book if you are currently connected withPhone B.


“Transfer entry” �A

Use the Transfer Entry command to store a newname in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name youwould like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”If the name is too long or too short, the systemtells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a namealready stored, the system tells you, then promptsyou for a name again.

The system will ask you to transfer a phonenumber stored in the cellular phone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”See “How to say numbers” in this section formore information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledgesthe command and asks you to initiate the transferfrom the phone handset. The new contact phonenumber will be transferred from the cellularphone via the Bluetooth� communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to eachcellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructionson transferring phone numbers from NISSANrecommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts youfor the next command. When you have finishedentering numbers or transferring an entry, choose“Store.”

The system confirms the name, location andnumber.

“Delete entry” �B

Use the Delete Entry command to erase oneentry from the phonebook. After the system rec-ognizes the command, speak the name to deleteor say “List Names” to choose an entry.

“List names” �C

Use the List Names command to hear all thenames in the phonebook.

The system recites the phonebook entries butdoes not include the actual phone numbers.When the playback of the list is complete, thesystem goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any timeby pressing the button on the steeringwheel. The system ends the VR session.

“Phonebook” (phones with automaticphonebook download function)

NOTE:

The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-able when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phonebook”

“List Names” �A

“Transfer Entry” �B

“Delete Entry” �C

“Record Name” �D

For phones that support automatic download ofthe phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth� profile), the“Phonebook” command is used to manage en-tries in the vehicle phonebook. You can say thename of an entry at this menu to initiate dialing ofthat entry.

The phonebook stores up to 1000 names foreach phone connected to the system.

When a phone is connected to the system, thephonebook is automatically downloaded to thevehicle. This feature allows you to access yourphonebook from the Bluetooth� system and callcontacts by name. You can record a customvoice tag for contact names that the system has


difficulty recognizing. For more information see“Record name” in this section.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone-book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-book if you are currently connected withPhone B.

“List names” �A

Use the List Names command to hear all thenames and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries butdoes not include the actual phone numbers.When the playback of the list is complete, thesystem goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any timeby pressing the button on the steeringwheel. The system ends the VR session. See the“Record name” command in this section for infor-mation about recording custom voice tags for listentries that the system has difficulty pronounc-ing.

“Transfer entry” �B

Use the Transfer Entry command to store a newname in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name youwould like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”If the name is too long or too short, the systemtells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a namealready stored, the system tells you, then promptsyou for a name again.

The system will ask you to transfer a phonenumber stored in the cellular phone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”See “How to say numbers” in this section formore information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledgesthe command and asks you to initiate the transferfrom the phone handset. The new contact phonenumber will be transferred from the cellularphone via the Bluetooth� communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to eachcellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructionson transferring phone numbers from NISSANrecommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts youfor the next command. When you have finishedentering numbers or transferring an entry, choose“Store.”

The system confirms the name, location andnumber.

“Delete entry” �C

Use the Delete Entry command to erase oneentry from the phonebook. After the system rec-ognizes the command, speak the name to deleteor say “List Names” to choose an entry.

“Record name” �D

The system allows you to record custom voicetags for contact names in the phonebook that thevehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature canalso be used to record voice tags to directly dialan entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voicetags can be recorded to the system.

“Recent Calls”

Main Menu

“Recent Calls”

“Outgoing” �A

“Incoming” �B

“Missed” �C


Use the Recent Calls command to access out-going, incoming or missed calls.

“Outgoing” �A

Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoingcalls made from the vehicle.

“Incoming” �B

Use the Incoming command to list the incomingcalls made to the vehicle.

“Missed” �C

Use the Missed command to list the calls made tothe vehicle that were not answered.

“Connect Phone”

NOTE:

The Add Phone command is not availablewhen the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Connect Phone”

“Add Phone” �A

“Select Phone” �B

“Delete Phone” �C

“Turn Bluetooth OFF” �D

Use the Connect Phone commands to managethe phones connecting to the vehicle or to enablethe Bluetooth� function on the vehicle.

“Add Phone” �A

Use the Add Phone command to add a phone tothe vehicle. See “Connecting procedure” in thissection for more information.

“Select Phone” �B

Use the Select Phone command to select from alist of phones connected to the vehicle. The sys-tem will list the names assigned to each phoneand then prompt you for the phone you wish toselect. Only one phone can be active at a time.

“Delete Phone” �C

Use the Delete Phone command to delete aphone that is connected to the vehicle. The sys-tem will list the names assigned to each phoneand then prompt you for the phone you wish todelete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will alsodelete that phonebook for that phone.

“Turn Bluetooth OFF” �D

Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to preventa wireless connection to your phone.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE

Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-dialect users to train the system to improve rec-ognition accuracy. By repeating a number ofcommands, the users can create a voice model oftheir own voice that is stored in the system. Thesystem is capable of storing a different speakeradaptation model for each connected phone.

Training procedure

The procedure for training a voice is as follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quietoutdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-sion in P (Park).

3. Press and hold the button for morethan 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for thehands-free phone system to enter thespeaker adaptation mode or press thePHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-ferent language.”

5. Press the button.


For information on selecting a different lan-guage, see “Choosing a language” in thissection.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is selectedautomatically. If both memory locations arealready in use, the system will prompt you tooverwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-vided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you areready to begin, press the button.

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow theinstructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tellyou an adequate number of phrases havebeen recorded.

10. The system will announce that speaker ad-aptation has been completed and the sys-tem is ready.

The SA mode will stop if:

● The button is pressed for more than 5seconds in SA mode.

● The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.

● The ignition switch is placed in the OFF orLOCK position.

Training phrases

During the SA mode, the system instructs thetrainer to say the following phrases. (The systemwill prompt you for each phrase.)

● phonebook transfer entry

● dial three oh four two nine

● delete call back number

● incoming

● transfer entry

● eight pause nine three two pause seven

● delete all entries

● call seven two four zero nine

● phonebook delete entry

● next entry

● dial star two one seven oh

● yes

● no

● select

● missed

● dial eight five six nine two

● Bluetooth on

● outgoing

● call three one nine oh two

● nine seven pause pause three oh eight

● cancel

● call back number

● call star two zero nine five

● delete phone

● dial eight three zero five one

● record name

● four three pause two nine pause zero

● delete redial number

● phonebook list names

● call eight oh five four one

● correction

● connect phone

● dial seven four oh one eight

● previous entry


● delete

● dial nine seven two six six

● call seven six three oh one

● go back

● call five six two eight zero

● dial six six four three seven

MANUAL CONTROL

While using the voice recognition system, it ispossible to select menu options by using thesteering wheel controls instead of speaking voicecommands. The manual control mode does notallow dialing a phone number by digits. The usermay select an entry from the Phonebook or Re-cent Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition,exit the manual control mode by pressing andholding the PHONE/END ( ) button. At thattime, pressing the PHONE/SEND ( ) buttonwill start the Hands Free Phone System.

Operating tips

● To enter manual control mode, start thevoice recognition system and tilt the tuning( ) switch up or down. The system willspeak �Showing Manual Options� whenmanual controls are initially activated.

● To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning( ) switch up or down. The system willalways speak the current menu option. De-pending on the audio display, it will alsoshow the current menu option.

● To select the current menu option, press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button.

● To go back to the previous menu, press thePHONE/END ( ) button. If the currentmenu is the Main Menu, pressing thePHONE/END ( ) button will exit thePhone system.

● To exit the manual control mode, press andhold the PHONE/END ( ) button for 5seconds.


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEThe system should respond correctly to all voicecommands without difficulty. If problems are en-countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, tryeach solution in turn, starting with number 1, untilthe problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section.2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is toonoisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode” in this section.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from thephone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed byusing the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook” in this section.2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.


MEMO


5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-7Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

WARNING

● Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assistanceof others alone in your vehicle. Petsshould also not be left alone. Theycould accidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent operation ofthe vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.


EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

● Do not breathe exhaust gases; theycontain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-ous. It can cause unconsciousness ordeath.

● If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with all win-dows fully open, and have the vehicleinspected immediately.

● Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

● Do not park the vehicle with the enginerunning for any extended length of time.

● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,otherwise exhaust gases could bedrawn into the passenger compart-ment. If you must drive with the trunk lidopen, follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-ton to off and the fan control dial toHI to circulate the air.

● If electrical wiring or other cable con-nections must pass to a trailer throughthe seal on the trunk lid or the body,follow the manufacturer’s recommen-dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-try into the vehicle.

● The exhaust system and body should beinspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes areentering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system, un-derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission controldevice installed in the exhaust system. Exhaustgases in the three-way catalyst are burned athigh temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-tem are very hot. Keep people, animalsor flammable materials away from theexhaust system components.

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

CAUTION

● Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline will seriously re-duce the three-way catalyst’s ability tohelp reduce exhaust pollutants.

● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-able loss of performance or other un-usual operating conditions aredetected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly by a NISSAN dealer.

● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuellevel. Running out of fuel could causethe engine to misfire, damaging thethree-way catalyst.

● Do not race the engine while warming itup.

● Do not push or tow your vehicle to startthe engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS) (if so equipped)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold and in-flated to the inflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, you should stop andcheck all 4 tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle’s handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-function exists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of replacement or alter-nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Additional information:

● The TPMS does not monitor the tirepressure of the spare tire.

Starting and driving 5-3

● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicleis driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25km/h). Also, this system may not detect asudden drop in tire pressure (for example aflat tire while driving).

● The low tire pressure warning light does notautomatically turn off when the tire pressureis adjusted for all 4 tires. After the tires areinflated to the recommended pressure, thevehicle must be driven at speeds above 16MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS andturn off the low tire pressure warning light.Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tirepressure.

● Tire pressure rises and falls depending onthe heat caused by the vehicle’s operationand the outside temperature. Low outsidetemperature can lower the temperature ofthe air inside the tire which can cause alower tire inflation pressure. This may causethe low tire pressure warning light to illumi-nate. If the warning light illuminates in lowambient temperature, check the tire pres-sure for all four tires.

● The Tire and Loading Information label (alsoreferred to as the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label) is located in thedriver’s door opening.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressurewarning light” in the “Instruments and controls”section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damagethe tires and increase the likelihood oftire failure. Serious vehicle damagecould occur and may lead to an acci-dent and could result in serious per-sonal injury. Check the tire pressure forall four tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label, located on the driver’s dooropening, to turn the low tire pressurewarning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,replace it with a spare tire as soon aspossible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In caseof emergency” section for changing aflat tire.)

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash for approximately 1 minute.The light will remain on after 1 minute.Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.


● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metalparts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. Thismay cause poor reception of the signalsfrom the tire pressure sensors, and theTPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarilyinterfere with the operation of the TPMS andcause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-minate.


Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar radiofrequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies isbeing used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or aDC/AC converter is being used in or near thevehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and

(2) This device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation. Note:Changes or modification not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of In-dustry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference,and

(2) This device must accept any interfer-ence, include interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey alltraffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, highspeed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers,because these driving practices could cause youto lose control of your vehicle. As with any ve-hicle, loss of control could result in a colli-sion with other vehicles or objects or causethe vehicle to roll over, particularly if the lossof control causes the vehicle to slide side-ways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid drivingwhen tired. Never drive when under the influence ofalcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness).Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the“Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental re-straint system” section of this manual, and alsoinstruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisionsand rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedor improperly belted person is significantlymore likely to be injured or killed than aperson properly wearing a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERYIf the right side or left side wheels leave the roadsurface, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-ing the procedure below. Please note that thisprocedure is only a general guide. The vehiclemust be driven as appropriate based on the con-ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.2. Do not apply the brakes.3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straightcourse.

4. When appropriate , slowly release the accel-erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-hicle to follow the road while vehicle speedis reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-hicle back onto the road surface until vehiclespeed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn thesteering wheel until both tires return to theroad surface. When all tires are on the roadsurface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-propriate driving lane.


● If you decide that it is not safe to return thevehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,road or traffic conditions, gradually slow thevehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occurif the tire is punctured or is damaged due tohitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure losscan also be caused by driving on under-inflatedtires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handlingand stability of the vehicle, especially at highwayspeeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-ing the correct air pressure and visually inspectthe tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels andtires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses airpressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintaincontrol of the vehicle by following the procedurebelow. Please note that this procedure is only ageneral guide. The vehicle must be driven asappropriate based on the conditions of the ve-hicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase thechance of losing control of the vehicle ifthere is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.Losing control of the vehicle may cause acollision and result in personal injury.● The vehicle generally moves or pulls in

the direction of the flat tire.● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.● Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not over react.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheelwith both hands and try to hold a straightcourse.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe locationoff the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to graduallystop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers andeither contact a roadside emergency serviceto change the tire or see “Changing a flattire” in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcoholor drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-duces coordination, delays reaction timeand impairs judgement. Driving afterdrinking alcohol increases the likelihoodof being involved in an accident injuringyourself and others. Additionally, if youare injured in an accident, alcohol canincrease the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,you must choose not to drive under the influenceof alcohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-though the local laws vary on what is consideredto be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcoholaffects all people differently and most peopleunderestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! Andthat is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if yourability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.


WARNING

● Never remove or turn the key to theLOCK position while driving. The steer-ing wheel will lock (for models with asteering lock mechanism). This maycause the driver to lose control of thevehicle and could result in serious ve-hicle damage or personal injury.

● Never place the ignition switch in theLOCK position while driving. The steer-ing wheel will lock (for models with asteering lock mechanism). This maycause the driver to lose control of thevehicle and could result in serious ve-hicle damage or personal injury. NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if so

equipped)The Intelligent Key can operate the ignitionswitch without taking the key out from yourpocket or purse. The operating environmentand/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Keyoperation.

CAUTION

● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key withyou when operating the vehicle.

● Never leave the Intelligent Key insidethe vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

● If the vehicle battery is discharged theignition switch cannot be moved fromthe “LOCK” position and if the steeringlock is engaged, the steering wheel maynot be able to be moved. Charge thebattery as soon as possible. (See“JUMP STARTING” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.)LSD0175

IGNITION SWITCH


Operating range

The Intelligent Key functions can only be usedwhen the Intelligent Key is within the specifiedoperating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-charged or strong radio waves are present nearthe operating location, the Intelligent Key sys-tem’s operating range becomes narrower andmay not function properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range,it is possible for anyone, even someone who doesnot carry the Intelligent Key, to turn the ignitionswitch to start the engine.

The operating range of the engine start functionis inside of the vehicle �1 .

● If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instru-ment panel, rear parcel shelf, inside theglove box, storage bin or door pocket, theIntelligent Key may not function.

● If the Intelligent Key is placed near the dooror window outside the vehicle, the IntelligentKey may function.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLETRANSMISSION (CVT) (if soequipped)

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignitionswitch cannot be turned to the LOCK positionuntil the shift selector is moved to the P (Park)position.

● When moving the ignition switch to theLOCK position, make sure the shift selectoris in the P (Park) position.

WSD0191

Without Intelligent Key

WSD0041


● When removing the key from the ignitionswitch, make sure the shift selector is in theP (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be turned to theLOCK position:

1. Shift the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion.

2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ONdirection.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion.

4. Remove the key if it is inserted in the ignitionswitch.

If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi-tion, the shift selector cannot be moved from theP (Park) position.

The shift selector can be moved if the igni-tion switch is placed in the ON position andthe foot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position between theLOCK and ACC positions. The OFF positionis indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if soequipped)The ignition switch includes a device that helpsprevent accidental removal of the key while driv-ing.

The key can only be removed when the ignitionswitch is in the LOCK position.

On manual transmission models, to turn the igni-tion switch to the LOCK position from the ACC orON position, place the ignition switch in the OFFposition, push the key in, then place the ignitionswitch in LOCK position.

With Intelligent KeyLSD0175 WSD0052


IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS

LOCK: Normal parking position (0)

● Intelligent Key:

● PUSH OFF- The steering lock can onlybe locked at this position (for vehiclesequipped with a steering lock mecha-nism).

OFF: (1)

The engine can be turned off without locking thesteering wheel (for vehicles equipped with asteering lock mechanism).

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessoriessuch as the radio when the engine is not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

● Intelligent Key:

● PUSH ON- The ignition switch will beunlocked while carrying the IntelligentKey.

This position turns on the ignition system and theelectrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as theengine has started, release the key. It automati-cally returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will notallow the engine to start without the use of theregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused by an-other registered key, an automated toll road de-vice or automatic payment device on the key ring),restart the engine using the following procedure:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF orLOCK position, and wait approximately 10seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

● Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-ant, brake and clutch fluid, and windshield-washer fluid as frequently as possible, or atleast whenever you refuel.

● Check that all windows and lights are clean.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also check tires for properinflation.

● Lock all doors.

● Position seat and adjust head restraints.

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers todo likewise.

● Check the operation of warning lights whenthe key is turned to the ON (3) position. See“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-minders” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE


1. Apply the parking brake.

2. CVT model:

Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift selector cannot be moved outof P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition switch isturned to the OFF position or if the keyis removed from the ignition switch.

The starter is designed not to operate ifthe shift selector is in any of the drivingpositions.

Manual transmission model:

Move the shift selector to N (Neutral). De-press the clutch pedal to the floor whilecranking the engine.

The starter is designed not to operateunless the clutch pedal is fully de-pressed.

Models with Intelligent Key: Slowly“PUSH ON” the ignition switch. When theIntelligent Key warning light in themeter illuminates in green, the ignitionswitch can be turned.

The Intelligent Key must be carriedwhen operating the ignition switch.

When the Intelligent Key warninglight in the meter blinks in red and theinside warning buzzer emits a short beep, besure that the shift selector is in the P (Park)position and the ignition switch is securelyreturned to the LOCK position.

The Intelligent Key warning light blink-ing in red, turns off by performing the follow-ing operations:

● Return the ignition switch to the LOCKposition.

● Turn the ignition switch to the ACC posi-tion.

When the buzzer beeps 4 times continu-ously, check for the following:

● The ignition switch is returned to theLOCK position.

● The mechanical key is not inserted intothe ignition switch.

The inside warning buzzer stops when oneof the following is performed:

● Return the ignition switch to the LOCKposition.

● Remove the mechanical key from the ig-nition switch.

● Close the doors.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off theaccelerator pedal by turning the ignitionswitch to START. Release the switch whenthe engine starts. If the engine starts, butfails to run, repeat the above procedure.

● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-tremely cold weather or when restarting,depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold itand then crank the engine. Release theswitch and the accelerator pedal whenthe engine starts.

● If the engine is very hard to start becauseit is flooded, depress the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and hold it.Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. Aftercranking the engine, release the accel-erator pedal. Crank the engine with yourfoot off the accelerator pedal by turn-ing the ignition switch to START. Releasethe key when the engine starts. If theengine starts, but fails to run, repeat theabove procedure.

STARTING THE ENGINE


CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than15 seconds at a time. If the engine doesnot start, turn the ignition switch to offand wait 10 seconds before crankingagain, otherwise the starter could bedamaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-onds after starting. Do not race the enginewhile warming it up. Drive at moderatespeed for a short distance first, especially incold weather.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLETRANSMISSION (CVT) (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low).Always depress the brake pedal untilshifting is completed. Failure to do socould cause you to lose control andhave an accident.

● Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)while the vehicle is moving. This couldcause an accident.

CAUTION

When stopping the vehicle on an uphillgrade, do not hold the vehicle by depress-ing the accelerator pedal. The foot brakeshould be used for this purpose.

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con-trolled to produce maximum power and smoothoperation.

The recommended operating procedures for thistransmission are shown on the following pages.Follow these procedures for maximum vehicleperformance and driving enjoyment.

NOTE:

Engine power may be automatically re-duced to protect the CVT if the enginespeed increases quickly when driving onslippery roads or while being tested onsome dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before moving the shiftselector out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed andmove the shift selector into a driving gear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually startthe vehicle in motion.

4. Stop the vehicle completely before shiftingthe shift selector to the P (Park) position.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE


The CVT is designed so the foot brakepedal MUST be depressed before shiftingfrom P (Park) to any drive position whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

The shift selector cannot be moved out of P(Park) and into any of the other gear posi-tions if the ignition switch is turned to theLOCK or OFF position or if the key is re-moved.

To move the shift selector:

Push the button �A while depressing thebrake pedal

Push the button �A to shift

Shift without pushing button �A

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brakepedal and move the shift selector from P (Park) toany of the desired shift positions.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift selec-tor is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal injuryor property damage.

If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position forany reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), orany drive position, the key cannot be turned to theLOCK position and be removed from the ignitionswitch. If this occurs, perform the following steps:

1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle isstopped.

2. Move the shift selector to P (Park) to park thevehicle and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK position to remove the key.

P (Park):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use theP (Park) or R (Reverse) position only whenthe vehicle is completely stopped.

LSD0177


Use the P (Park) selector position when the ve-hicle is parked or when starting the engine. Makesure the vehicle is completely stopped. Thebrake pedal must be depressed and theshift selector button pushed in to move theshift selector from N (Neutral) or any driveposition to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.When parking on a hill, apply the parking brakefirst, then place the shift selector into the P (Park)position.

R (Reverse):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use theP (Park) or R (Reverse) position only whenthe vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Makesure the vehicle is completely stopped beforeselecting R (Reverse) position. R (Reverse)speed is limited to 25 MPH (40 km/h). Do notexceed 25 MPH (40 km/h) in the R (Reverse)position. The brake pedal must be de-pressed and the shift selector buttonpushed in to move the shift selector from P(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R(Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Theengine can be started in this position. You mayshift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled enginewhile the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

L (Low):

Use this position for maximum engine braking onsteep downhill gradients/climbing steep slopesand whenever approaching sharp bends. Do notuse the L (Low) position in any other circum-stances.

Manual shift mode (if so equipped)

When the manual shift mode button �A ispressed with the vehicle stopped or while driving,the transmission enters the manual shift mode.Shift ranges can be selected manually using thepaddles on the steering wheel �B and �C .

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is dis-played on the position indicator in the meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

M1←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6

WSD0192


M6 (6th):

Use this position for all normal forward driving athighway speeds.

M5 (5th):

Use this position when driving up long slopes, orfor engine braking when driving down longslopes.

M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhillgrades.

M1 (1st):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowlyor driving slowly through deep snow, sand ormud, or for maximum engine braking on steepdownhill grades.

● Remember not to drive at high speeds forextended periods of time in lower than M6range. This reduces fuel economy.

When shifting up:

Pull the + �C paddle on the steering wheeltowards you. (Shifts to higher range.)

When shifting down:

Pull the � �B paddle on the steering wheeltowards you. (Shifts to lower range.)

● Pulling the same paddle twice will shift theranges in succession. However, if this mo-tion is rapidly done, the second shifting maynot be completed properly.

When canceling the manual shift mode:

Press the manual shift mode button �A to returnthe transmission to the normal driving mode.

● In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion may not shift to the selected gear.This helps maintain driving perfor-mance and reduces the chance of ve-hicle damage or loss of control.

● In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion may shift up automatically to ahigher range than selected if the en-gine speed is too high. When the ve-hicle speed decreases, the transmis-sion automatically shifts down. Thetransmission shifts to M1 (1st) gearbefore the vehicle comes to a com-plete stop. When accelerating again, itis necessary to shift up to the desiredrange.

● When the CVT fluid temperature is ex-tremely low, the manual shift mode may notwork and automatically shift as a drive mode.This is not a malfunction. In this case, pressthe manual shift button �A off and drive for awhile and then reactivate the manual shiftmode.

● When the CVT fluid temperature is high, theshift range may upshift in lower rpm thanusual. This is not a malfunction.

LSD0193


Shift lock release

If the battery is discharged, the shift selector maynot be moved from the P (Park) position even withthe brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift selector, release the shift lock.The shift selector can be moved to N (Neutral).

To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-lowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion and remove the key


3. Remove the shift lock release cover asshown.

4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lockrelease slot and push down.

5. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)position while holding down the shift lockrelease.

6. Now the vehicle may be moved to the de-sired location.

If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P(Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the trans-mission as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the shift selector cannot be moved fromthe P (Park) position while the engine isrunning and the brake pedal is depressed,the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-ing stop lights could cause an accidentinjuring yourself and others.

Overdrive (O/D) OFF switchWhen the O/D OFF switch is pushed with theshift selector in the D (Drive) position, thelight in the instrument panel illuminates. See“Overdrive off indicator light (CVT models)” in the“Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

Use the Overdrive off mode when you need im-proved engine braking.

To turn off the Overdrive off mode, push the O/DOFF switch again. The indicator light willturn off.

LSD0178 LSD0179


Each time the engine is started, or when the shiftselector is shifted to any position other than D(Drive), the Overdrive off mode will be automati-cally turned off.

Accelerator downshift— in D position —For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-sion down into a lower gear, depending on thevehicle speed.

Fail-safeWhen the fail-safe operation occurs, the CVT willnot be shifted into the selected driving position.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-ditions, such as excessive wheel spinningand subsequent hard braking, the fail-safesystem may be activated. The MIL maycome on to indicate the fail-safe mode isactivated, see “Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL)” in the “Instruments and controls”section. This will occur even if all electricalcircuits are functioning properly. In thiscase, place the ignition switch in the OFFposition and wait for 10 seconds. Thenplace the ignition switch back in the ONposition. The vehicle should return to itsnormal operating condition. If it does notreturn to its normal operating condition,

have a NISSAN dealer check the transmis-sion and repair if necessary.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature protec-tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs,vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.The reduced speed may be lower thanother traffic, which could increase thechance of a collision. Be especially care-ful when driving. If necessary, pull to theside of the road at a safe place and allowthe transmission to return to normal op-eration, or have it repaired if necessary.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

● Do not over-rev the engine when shift-ing to a lower gear. This may cause aloss of control or engine damage.

CAUTION

● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedalwhile driving. This may cause clutchdamage.

● Fully depress the clutch pedal beforeshifting to help prevent transmissiondamage.

● Stop your vehicle completely beforeshifting into R (Reverse).

● When the vehicle is stopped with theengine running (for example, at a stoplight), shift to N (Neutral) and releasethe clutch pedal with the foot brakeapplied.


Shifting

To change gears or when upshifting or down-shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift intothe appropriate gear, then release the clutchslowly and smoothly.

To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depressthe clutch pedal before operating the shift selec-tor. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressedbefore the transmission is shifted, a gear noisemay be heard. Transmission damage may occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd,4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence accordingto vehicle speed.

To back up, lift up on the shift selector ring �1 andthen move it to the R (Reverse) position afterstopping the vehicle completely.

The shift selector ring �1 returns to its originalposition when the shift selector is moved to the N(Neutral) position.

If it is difficult to move the shift selector into R(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), thenrelease the clutch pedal. Depress the clutchpedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).

Suggested up-shift speeds

The following are suggested vehicle speeds forshifting into a higher gear. These suggestionsrelate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.Actual upshift speeds will vary according to roadconditions, the weather and individual drivinghabits.

GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h)1st to 2nd 8 (13)2nd to 3rd 17 (27)3rd to 4th 25 (40)4th to 5th 36 (58)5th to 6th 51 (82)

Suggested maximum speed in eachgearDownshift to a lower gear if the engine is notrunning smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,use the highest gear suggested for that speed.Always observe posted speed limits, and driveaccording to the road conditions, which will en-sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the enginewhen shifting to a lower gear as it may causeengine damage or loss of vehicle control.MR20DE engine models:

GEAR MPH (km/h)1st 27 (44)2nd 49 (79)3rd 68 (109)4th —5th —6th —

QR25DE engine models:

GEAR MPH (km/h)1st 33 (53)2nd 53 (86)3rd 75 (121)4th —5th —6th —

LSD0180


WARNING

● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

● Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

● Do not use the shift selector in place ofthe parking brake. When parking, besure the parking brake is fully engaged.

● Do not leave children unattended in avehicle. They could release the parkingbrake and cause an accident.

To engage: Pull the lever up �A .

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift selector in the N (Neutral)position.

CVT models:

Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position.

3. While pulling up on the parking brake leverslightly, push the button and lower com-pletely �B .

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

1. ACCEL/RES switch2. COAST/SET switch3. CANCEL switch4. ON/OFF switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

● If the cruise control system malfunctions, itcancels automatically. The SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel then blinks towarn the driver.

● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn thecruise control switch off and have the sys-tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

WSD0169 LSD0176

PARKING BRAKE CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)


● The SET indicator light may blink when thecruise control switch is turned ON whilepushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, orCANCEL switch. To properly set the cruisecontrol system, use the following proce-dures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when drivingunder the following conditions:

● When it is not possible to keep thevehicle at a set speed.

● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies inspeed.

● On winding or hilly roads.

● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

● In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

CAUTION

On manual transmission models, do notshift into N (Neutral) without depressingthe clutch pedal when the cruise control isset. Should this occur, depress the clutchpedal and turn the main switch off imme-diately. Failure to do so may cause enginedamage.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push theON·OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light inthe instrument panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle tothe desired speed, push the COAST/SET switchand release it. The SET indicator light in theinstrument panel comes on. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the setspeed.

● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-celerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed.

● The vehicle may not maintain the set speedwhen going up or down steep hills. If thishappens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing three methods.

● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel goes out.

● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator lightgoes out.

● Push the ON·OFF switch off. Both theCRUISE indicator light and SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled andthe SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

● you depress the brake or clutch pedal whilepushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COASTswitch. The preset speed is deleted frommemory.

● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH(13 km/h) below the set speed.

● you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-mission), or move the shift selector to N(Neutral) (CVT).


To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push andrelease the COAST/SET switch.

● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.When the vehicle attains the speed you de-sire, release the switch.

● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.Each time you do this, the set speed in-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-hicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-lease the switch when the vehicle slows tothe desired speed.

● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.Each time you do this, the set speed de-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-turns to the last set cruising speed when thevehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to obtainmaximum engine performance and en-sure the future reliability and economy ofyour new vehicle. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in short-ened engine life and reduced engineperformance.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow, and do not run theengine over 4,000 rpm.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(800 km). Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintaincruising speeds with a constant acceleratorposition.

● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-hicles.

● Use a proper gear range which suits roadconditions. On level roads, shift into highgear as soon as possible.

● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Follow the recommended periodic mainte-nance schedule.

● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wearand lowers fuel economy.

● Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-proper alignment increases tire wear andlowers fuel economy.

● Air conditioner (if so equipped) operationlowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioneronly when necessary.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY


● When cruising at highway speeds, it is moreeconomical to use the air conditioner andleave the windows closed to reduce drag.

● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

● Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park) forCVT models or in an appropriate gear formanual transmission models. Failure todo so could cause the vehicle to moveunexpectedly or roll away and result inan accident. Make sure the shift selectorhas been pushed as far forward as it can

go and cannot be moved without de-pressing the foot brake pedal.

● Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.


1. Firmly apply the parking brake.2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift selector in the R (Reverse)position. When parking on an uphill grade,place the shift selector in 1st gear.

SSD0488

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS


Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) models:

Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling intotraffic when parked on an incline, it is a goodpractice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: �1

Turn the wheels into the curb and move thevehicle forward until the curb side wheelgently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: �2

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: �3

Turn the wheels toward the side of the roadso the vehicle will move away from the cen-ter of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion and remove the key.

WARNING

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe steering will not work. Steering willbe harder to operate.

● When the power steering warning lightilluminates with the engine running,there will be no power assist for thesteering. You will still have control ofthe vehicle but the steering will beharder to operate. Have the powersteering system checked by a NISSANdealer.

The power steering system is designed to pro-vide power assist while driving to operate thesteering wheel with light force.

When the steering wheel is operated repeatedlyor continuously while parking or driving at a verylow speed, the power assist for the steeringwheel will be reduced. This is to prevent over-heating of the power steering system and protectit from getting damaged. While the power assistis reduced, steering wheel operation will becomeheavy. When the temperature of the power steer-ing system goes down, the power assist level willreturn to normal. Avoid repeating such steeringwheel operations that could cause the powersteering system to overheat.

You may hear a sound when the steering wheel isoperated quickly. However, this is not a malfunc-tion.

If the electric power steering warning light PSilluminates while the engine is running, it mayindicate the power steering system is not func-tioning properly and may need servicing. Havethe power steering system checked by aNISSAN dealer.

When the electric power steering warning lightilluminates with the engine running, there will beno power assist for the steering but you will stillhave control of the vehicle. At this time, greatersteering effort is required to operate the steeringwheel, especially in sharp turns and at lowspeeds.

For additional information see “Electric powersteering warning light” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section.

POWER STEERING


The brake system has two separate hydrauliccircuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will stillhave braking at 2 wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using enginevacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop thevehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will berequired to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out thebrake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speed anddownshift to a lower gear before going down aslope or long grade. Overheated brakes mayreduce braking performance and could result inloss of vehicle control.

WARNING

● While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-erating could cause the wheels to skidand result in an accident.

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe brakes will not work. Braking will beharder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven throughwater, the brakes may get wet. As a result, yourbraking distance will be longer and the vehiclemay pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brake pedal toheat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes returnto normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at highspeeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever thestopping effect of the parking brake is weakenedor whenever the parking brake shoes and/ordrum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure thebest brake performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle servicemanual and can be performed by a NISSANdealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM(ABS)

WARNING

● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is asophisticated device, but it cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from carelessor dangerous driving techniques. It canhelp maintain vehicle control duringbraking on slippery surfaces. Remem-ber that stopping distances on slipperysurfaces will be longer than on normalsurfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-tances may also be longer on rough,gravel or snow covered roads, or if youare using tire chains. Always maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in frontof you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-sible for safety.

● Tire type and condition may also affectbraking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install thespecified size of tires on all fourwheels.

BRAKE SYSTEM


– When installing a spare tire, makesure that it is the proper size and typeas specified on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See “Tire andLoading Information label” in the“Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

– For detailed information, see“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls thebrakes so the wheels do not lock during hardbraking or when braking on slippery surfaces.The system detects the rotation speed at eachwheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-vent each wheel from locking and sliding. Bypreventing each wheel from locking, the systemhelps the driver maintain steering control andhelps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-pery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steerthe vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stoppingdistances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electricpumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. Thecomputer has a built-in diagnostic feature thattests the system each time you start the engineand move the vehicle at a low speed in forward orreverse. When the self-test occurs, you may heara “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brakepedal. This is normal and does not indicate amalfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates theABS warning light on the instrument panel. Thebrake system then operates normally, but withoutanti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during theself-test or while driving, have the vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to roadconditions.

When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels areclose to locking up, the actuator rapidly appliesand releases hydraulic pressure. This action issimilar to pumping the brakes very quickly. Youmay feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear anoise from under the hood or feel a vibration fromthe actuator when it is operating. This is normaland indicates that the ABS is operating properly.However, the pulsation may indicate that roadconditions are hazardous and extra care is re-quired while driving.


The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system usesvarious sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-hicle motion. Under certain driving conditions,the VDC System helps to perform the followingfunctions:

● Controls brake pressure to reduce wheelslip on one slipping drive wheel so power istransferred to a non slipping drive wheel onthe same axle.

● Controls brake pressure and engine outputto reduce drive wheel slip based on vehiclespeed (traction control function).

● Controls brake pressure at individual wheelsand engine output to help the driver maintaincontrol of the vehicle in the following condi-tions:

– understeer (vehicle tends to not followthe steered path despite increased steer-ing input)

– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due tocertain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to maintaincontrol of the vehicle, but it can not prevent lossof vehicle control in all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the indi-cator in the instrument panel flashes so note thefollowing:

● The road may be slippery or the system maydetermine some action is required to helpkeep the vehicle on the steered path.

● You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedaland hear a noise or vibration from under thehood. This is normal and indicates that theVDC system is working properly.

● Adjust your speed and driving to the roadconditions.

See “Slip indicator light” and ”Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) off indicator light” in the ”Instru-ments and controls” section.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, theand indicator lights come on in the instru-ment panel. The VDC system automatically turnsoff when these indicator lights are on.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDCsystem. The indicator illuminates to indi-cate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC switch is used to turn off thesystem, the VDC system still operates to preventone drive wheel from slipping by transferringpower to a non slipping drive wheel. Theindicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDCfunctions are off and the indicator will notflash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to onwhen the ignition switch is placed in the offposition then back to the on position.

The computer has a built in diagnostic featurethat tests the system each time you start theengine and move the vehicle forward or in reverseat a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, youmay hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation inthe brake pedal. This is normal and is not anindication of a malfunction.

WARNING

● The VDC system is designed to help thedriver maintain stability but does notprevent accidents due to abrupt steer-ing operation at high speeds or by care-less or dangerous driving techniques.Reduce vehicle speed and be especiallycareful when driving and cornering onslippery surfaces and always drivecarefully.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM (if so equipped)


● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,bushings and wheels are not NISSANrecommended for your vehicle or areextremely deteriorated, the VDC systemmay not operate properly. This couldadversely affect vehicle handling per-formance, and the indicator may

flash or both the and indi-cator lights may illuminate.

● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are extremelydeteriorated, the VDC system may notoperate properly and both theand the indicator lights mayilluminate.

● If engine control related parts are notNISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, both the andindicator lights may illuminate.

● When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the VDC system may not operate prop-erly and the indicator may flash or

both the and indicatorlights may illuminate. Do not drive onthese types of roads.

● When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the indicator may flash or

both the and indicatorlights may illuminate. This is not a mal-function. Restart the engine after driv-ing onto a stable surface.

● If wheels or tires other than the NISSANrecommended ones are used, the VDCsystem may not operate properly andthe indicator may flash or both

the and indicator lights mayilluminate.

● The VDC system is not a substitute forwinter tires or tire chains on a snowcovered road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCKTo prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomesfrozen, heat the key before inserting it into the keyhole, or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if soequipped) or the NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if soequipped).

ANTI-FREEZEIn the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check theanti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

BATTERYIf the battery is not fully charged during extremelycold weather conditions, the battery fluid mayfreeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-mum efficiency, the battery should be checkedregularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING


DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including theengine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed toprovide superior performance on dry pave-ment. However, the performance of thesetires will be substantially reduced in snowyand icy conditions. If you operate your ve-hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALLSEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Pleaseconsult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,size, speed rating and availability informa-tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some U.S.states and Canadian provinces prohibit theiruse. Check local, state and provincial lawsbefore installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For details see“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items becarried in the vehicle during winter:

● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to removeice and snow from the windows and wiperblades.

● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

● Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” underthese conditions. Try to avoid driving onwet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-tion. Accelerate and slow down withcare. If accelerating or downshifting toofast, the drive wheels will lose evenmore traction.

● Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

● Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patch ofice is seen ahead, brake before reach-ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,and avoid any sudden steeringmaneuvers.

● Do not use the cruise control (if soequipped) on slippery roads.

● Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.


ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Do not use your engine block heaterwith an ungrounded electrical systemor a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-riously injured by an electrical shock ifyou use an ungrounded connection.

● Disconnect and properly store the en-gine block heater cord before startingthe engine. Damage to the cord couldresult in an electrical shock and cancause serious injury.

● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plugthe extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded110-VAC outlet. Failure to use theproper extension cord or a groundedoutlet can result in a fire or electricalshock and cause serious personalinjury.

Engine block heaters are available throughNISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperaturestarting. The engine block heater should be usedwhen the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) orlower.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine blockheater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into agrounded 3 wire, 3 pronged extension cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged infor at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outsidetemperatures, to properly warm the enginecoolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn theengine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-erly store the cord to keep it away frommoving parts.


MEMO


6 In case of emergency

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-14

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS) (if so equipped)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-sure of all tires except the spare. When the lowtire pressure warning light is lit, one or more ofyour tires is significantly under-inflated. If thevehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, theTPMS will activate and warn you of it by the lowtire pressure warning light. This system will acti-vate only when the vehicle is driven at speedsabove 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, referto “Warning/indicator lights and audible remind-ers” in the “Instruments and controls” section,and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”in the “Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damagethe tires and increase the likelihood oftire failure. Serious vehicle damagecould occur and may lead to an acci-dent and could result in serious per-sonal injury. Check the tire pressure forall four tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label to turn the low tire pressurewarning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,replace it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash for approximately 1 minute.The light will remain on after 1 minute.Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.


● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-low:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road andaway from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parkingbrake. Shift the manual transmission into R(Reverse), or the CVT into P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and tosignal professional road assistance person-nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicleand stand in a safe place, away from trafficand clear of the vehicle.

FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

WARNING

● Make sure the parking brake is securelyapplied and the manual transmission isshifted into R (Reverse), or the CVT isshifted into P (Park).

● Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

● Never change tires if oncoming traffic isclose to your vehicle. Wait for profes-sional road assistance.

Blocking wheelsPlace suitable blocks �1 at both the front andback of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire�2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it isjacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury. Getting the spare tire and tools

1. Open the trunk and remove the trunk divider(if so equipped) and the cargo net (if soequipped). Lift the trunk floor carpeting andspare tire cover �A . Remove the jack and thespare tire as indicated.

WCE0044

LCE0134

In case of emergency 6-3

2. To remove the jack, turn the jack screwcounterclockwise and lift out.

Removing bolt-on wheel cover (if soequipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheelcaps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-sult in personal injury.

Wheel cover attachment to the wheel is made byone of the wheel lug nuts. This wheel lug nutneeds to be removed before the wheelcover can be removed from the wheel.

WCE0203 WCE0055


Jacking up vehicle and removing thedamaged tire

WARNING

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

● Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use thejack provided with your vehicle on othervehicles. The jack is designed for liftingonly your vehicle during a tire change.

● Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle for jacksupport.

● Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

● Never use blocks on or under the jack.

● Do not start or run the engine whilevehicle is on the jack. It may cause thevehicle to move. This is especially truefor vehicles with limited slipdifferentials.

● Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) offthe ground. It may cause the vehicle tomove.

CE1089


Always refer to the proper illustrations for thecorrect placement and jack-up points for yourspecific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached tothe jack body and the following instruc-tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns byturning counterclockwise with the wheel nutwrench. Do not remove the wheel nutsuntil the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated so the top of the jackcontacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.Align the jack head between the two

notches in the front or the rear as shown.Also fit the groove of the jack head betweenthe notches as shown.

The jack should be used on firm andlevel ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack leverand rod with both hands. Carefully raise thevehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-move the wheel nuts, and then remove thetire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. See specific instructions under theheading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tightenthe wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheelnuts alternately and evenly as illustrated untilthey are tight.

LCE0020 WCE0048


4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with the wheelnut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securelyin the sequence illustrated (�A , �B , �C , �D ).Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

● Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause the nutsto become loose.

● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nutsto the specified torque with a torquewrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecification at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has beenparked for three hours or more or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tireand Loading Information Label.

5. Securely store the flat tire in the vehicle.

6. Install the jack in its storage area and tightenthe jack screw clockwise.

7. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floorcarpeting over the damaged tire.

8. Close the trunk.

LCE0136


WARNING

● Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properly se-cured after use. Such items can becomedangerous projectiles in an accident orsudden stop.

● The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. See specific instructions un-der the heading “Wheels and tires” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, theinstructions and precautions below must be fol-lowed.

If the battery of a vehicle equipped with theNISSAN Intelligent Key ™ is discharged, theignition switch cannot be moved from theLOCK position, even using the mechanicalkey or the valet key. Connect the jumpercables to another vehicle, as in the case ofa discharged battery, and then the ignitionswitch can be moved from the LOCK posi-tion. Then, jump start the vehicle.

WARNING

● If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resulting insevere injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

● Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames away fromthe battery.

● Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-rosive sulfuric acid solution which cancause severe burns. If the fluid shouldcome into contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted area withwater.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● The booster battery must be rated at 12volts. Use of an improperly rated batterycan damage your vehicle.

● Whenever working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectors (forexample, goggles or industrial safetyspectacles) and remove rings, metalbands, or any other jewelry. Do not leanover the battery when jump starting.

● Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and cause se-rious injury.

● Your vehicle has an automatic enginecooling fan. It could come on at anytime. Keep hands and other objectsaway from it.

JUMP STARTING


● If the battery of a vehicle equipped withthe Intelligent Key system is dis-charged, the ignition switch cannot bemoved from the LOCK position, evenusing the mechanical key or the valetkey. Connect the jumper cables to an-other vehicle, as in the case of a dis-charged battery, and then the ignitionknob can be moved from the LOCK po-sition. Then, jump start the vehicle.

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damage tothe charging system and cause personalinjury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,position the two vehicles to bring their bat-teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-lector to N (Neutral) (manual transmission)or to P (Park) (CVT). Switch off all unneces-sary electrical systems (lights, heater, airconditioner, etc.).

3. Remove the vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with an oldcloth to reduce the explosion hazard.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the sequenceillustrated (�A , �B , �C , �D ).

WCE0054


CAUTION

● Always connect positive (�) to positive(�) and negative (�) to body ground (forexample, strut mounting bolt, enginelift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

● Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the engine com-partment and that the cable clamps donot contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle andlet it run for a few minutes.For Intelligent Key system equipped models,use the mechanical key to start the engine.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine doesnot start right away, place the ignitionswitch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 4seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-nect the negative cable and then the positivecable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Besure to dispose of the cloth used to coverthe vent holes, as it may be contaminatedwith corrosive acid.

CAUTION

● Do not push start this vehicle. Thethree-way catalyst may be damaged.

● Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) models cannot be push-started ortow-started. Attempting to do so maycause transmission damage.

● For manual transmission (M/T) models,never try to start the vehicle by towingit. When the engine starts, the forwardsurge could cause the vehicle to collidewith the tow vehicle.

PUSH STARTING


If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by anextremely high temperature gauge reading), or ifyou feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormalnoise, etc., take the following steps.

WARNING

● Do not continue to drive if your vehicleoverheats. Doing so could cause enginedamage or a vehicle fire.

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator cap while theengine is still hot. When the radiatorcap is removed, pressurized hot waterwill spurt out, possibly causing seriousinjury.

● Do not open the hood if steam is com-ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, applythe parking brake and move the shift selectorto N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P(Park) (CVT).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped).Open all the windows, move the heater or airconditioner temperature control to maximumhot and fan control to high speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the radiatorbefore opening the hood. (If steam or cool-ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do notopen the hood further until no steam orcoolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-gine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage orlooseness. Also check if the cooling fan isrunning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant is leaking,the water pump belt is missing or loose, orthe cooling fan does not run, stop the en-gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into contactwith, or get caught in, engine belts or theengine cooling fan. The engine coolingfan can start at any time.

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tankwith the engine running. Add coolant to theengine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSANdealer.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS


When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial inCanada) and local regulations for towing must befollowed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-tors are generally familiar with the applicable lawsand procedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damage to yourvehicle, NISSAN recommends having a serviceoperator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to havethe service operator carefully read the followingprecautions:

WARNING

● Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

● Never get under your vehicle after it hasbeen lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

● When towing, make sure that the trans-mission, axles, steering system andpowertrain are in working condition. Ifany of these conditions apply, dollies ora flatbed tow truck must be used.

● Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

For information about towing your vehicle behinda recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

�A (CVT) Continuously Variable Transmission�B (M/T) Manual transmission

WCE0194

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE


TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSANNISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towedwith the driving (front) wheels off the ground orplace the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

● Never tow Continuously Variable Trans-mission (CVT) models with the frontwheels on the ground or four wheels onthe ground (forward or backward), asthis may cause serious and expensivedamage to the transmission. If it is nec-essary to tow the vehicle with the rearwheels raised always use towing dolliesunder the front wheels.

● When towing Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) models with thefront wheels on towing dollies, or whentowing manual transmission (M/T)models with the front wheels on theground:

– Turn the ignition switch to the OFFposition, and secure the steeringwheel in a straight-ahead positionwith a rope or similar device. Neversecure the steering wheel by turningthe ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion. This may damage the steeringlock mechanism (for modelsequipped with steering lockmechanism).

– Move the shift selector to the N(Neutral) position.

�A (CVT) Continuously Variable Transmission�B (M/T) Manual transmission

WCE0195


● When towing Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) or manual trans-mission (M/T) models with the rearwheels on the ground (if you do not usetowing dollies): Always release theparking brake.

● Observe the following restricted towingspeeds and distances for manual trans-mission (M/T) models only:

– Speed: Below 50 MPH (80 km/h)

– Distance: Less than 50 miles (80 km)

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuckvehicle)

Pulling a stuck vehicle

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-sonal injury or death when recovering astuck vehicle:

● Contact a professional towing serviceto recover the vehicle if you have anyquestions regarding the recoveryprocedure.

● Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to towor free a stuck vehicle.

● Only use devices specifically designedfor vehicle recovery and follow themanufacturer’s instructions.

● Always pull the recovery device straightout from the front of the vehicle. Neverpull at an angle.

● Route recovery devices so they do nottouch any part of the vehicle except theattachment point.

FrontWCE0146

RearSCE0578


If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow themanufacturer’s instructions for the recovery de-vice.

Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing orvehicle recovery.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

● Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System(if so equipped).

2. Make sure the area in front and behind thevehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clearan area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-ward.

● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)and D (Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low)and R (Reverse) (M/T models).

● Apply the accelerator as little as possibleto maintain the rocking motion.

● Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R (Reverse) and D(Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low) and R(Reverse) (M/T models).

● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a fewtries, contact a professional towing serviceto remove the vehicle.


MEMO


7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Most common factors contributing to vehiclecorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:

● after a rainfall to prevent possible damagefrom acid rain.

● after driving on coastal roads.

● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs geton the paint surface.

● when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicleinside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in ashady area or protect the vehicle with a bodycover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surfacewhen putting on or removing the bodycover.

WASHINGWash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty ofwater. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mildsoap, a special vehicle soap or general purposedishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm(never hot) water.

CAUTION

● Do not use car washes that use acid inthe detergent. Some car washes, espe-cially brushless ones, use some acid forcleaning. The acid may react with someplastic vehicle components, causingthem to crack. This could affect theirappearance, and also could cause themnot to function properly. Always checkwith your car wash to confirm that acidis not used.

● Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical deter-gents, gasoline or solvents.

● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot, asthe surface may become water-spotted.

● Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of cleanwater.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areasmust be cleaned regularly. Take care that thedrain holes in the lower edge of the door areopen. Spray water under the body and in thewheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash awayroad salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle toavoid water spots.

WAXINGRegular waxing protects the paint surface andhelps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing isrecommended to remove built-up wax residueand to avoid a weathered appearance beforere-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing theproper product.

● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-ing. Follow the instructions supplied with thewax.

● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,cutting compounds or cleaners that maydamage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishingon a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull thefinish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

REMOVING SPOTSRemove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,and tree sap as quickly as possible from thesurface of the paint to avoid lasting damage orstaining. Special cleaning products are availableat a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessorystore.

UNDERBODYIn areas where road salt is used in winter, it isnecessary to clean the underbody regularly inorder to prevent dirt and salt from building up andcausing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-riod and again in the spring, the underseal mustbe checked and, if necessary, retreated. GLASS

When cleaning the rear window, it may be easierto clean if the inside high-mounted stop light (ifso equipped) is removed first.

Be careful when removing the high-mountedstop light to reduce the risk of damaging thehigh-mounted stop light wires.

To remove the high-mounted stop light:

�1 Push toward rear of vehicle.

�2 Lift to remove.

The high-mounted stop light must be properlyreinstalled before driving your vehicle.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust filmfrom the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass tobecome coated with a film after the vehicle isparked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a softcloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasivecleaners or chlorine-based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the electri-cal conductors, radio antenna elements orrear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELSWash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-ened in a mild soap solution, especially duringwinter months in areas where road salt is used. Ifnot removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

WAI0005

Appearance and care 7-3

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoidstaining or discoloring the wheels:

● Do not use a cleaner that uses strongacid or alkali contents to clean thewheels.

● Do not apply wheel cleaners to thewheels when they are hot. The wheeltemperature should be the same as am-bient temperature.

● Rinse the wheel to completely removethe cleaner within 15 minutes after thecleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tiredressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating tothe tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it mayreact with the coating and form a compound. Thiscompound may come off the tire while driving andstain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take thefollowing precautions:

● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-ing on the tire dissolves more easily thanwith an oil-based tire dressing.

● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to helpprevent it from entering the tiretread/grooves (where it would be difficult toremove).

● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a drytowel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

This vehicle has new and unique surfaces on thecenter console and door pull finishers. If cleaningis required use mild soap and water. However ifmild soap and water won’t clean the center con-sole and door pull finishers, use NISSAN Vinyland Leather Cleaner (or equivalent).

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interiortrim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuumcleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl andleather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with adry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order tomaintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-tectors contain chemicals that may stain orbleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to cleanthe meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hotsteam cleaners) on the seat. This candamage the seat or occupant classifica-tion sensor. This can also affect the opera-tion of the air bag system and result inserious personal injury.

CLEANING INTERIOR


CAUTION

● Never use benzene, thinner, or any simi-lar material on the interior surfaces orsurface damage may occur. Such dam-age is not covered under the NISSANwarranty.

● Small dirt particles can be abrasive anddamaging to leather surfaces andshould be removed promptly. Do notuse saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-gents or ammonia-based cleaners asthey may damage the leather’s naturalfinish.

● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-ommended by the manufacturer.

● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-age the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affectthe vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,take the following precautions:

● Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-manent discoloration when they contact ve-hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-ener in a location that allows it to hang freeand not contact an interior surface.

● Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip onthe vents. These products can cause imme-diate damage and discoloration whenspilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-structions before using the air fresheners.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference thatmay result in a collision or injury:

● NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-other floor mat in the driver frontposition.

● Use only genuine NISSAN floor matsspecifically designed for use in your ve-hicle model. See your NISSAN dealerfor more information.

● Properly position the mats in the floor-well using the floor mat positioning aid.See �Floor mat positioning aid� in thissection.

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make iteasier to clean the interior. Mats should be main-tained with regular cleaning and replaced if theybecome excessively worn.


Floor mat positioning aidThis vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket toact as a floor mat positioning aid. GenuineNISSAN floor mats have been specially designedfor your vehicle model. The driver’s and passen-ger’s side floor mats have a grommet hole incor-porated in them. Position the mat by placing thefloor mat bracket hook through the floor matgrommet hole while centering the mat in thefloorwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats areproperly positioned.

SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wiping themwith a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.Allow the belts to dry completely in the shadebefore using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-tal restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seat belts,since these materials may severelyweaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirtand debris in body panel sections, cavities,and other areas.

● Damage to paint and other protective coat-ings caused by gravel and stone chips orminor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.Wet floor coverings will not dry completely insidethe vehicle and should be removed for drying toavoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of highrelative humidity, especially those areas wherethe temperatures stay above freezing and whereatmospheric pollution exists and road salt isused.

LPD0484

CORROSION PROTECTION


TemperatureHigh temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollutionIndustrial pollution, the presence of salt in the airin coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLEFROM CORROSION

● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

● Always check for minor damage to the paintand repair it as soon as possible.

● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doorsopen to avoid water accumulation.

● Check the underbody for accumulation ofsand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with wateras soon as possible.

CAUTION

● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-bris from the passenger compartmentby washing it out with a hose. Removedirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

● Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing areextremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosionand deterioration of underbody componentssuch as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-sion, which may be required in some areas, con-sult a NISSAN dealer.


MEMO


8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . 8-13Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Clutch fluid (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25Keyfob (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 8-27

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38

Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-mum maintenance requirements with long ser-vice intervals to save you both time and money.However, some day-to-day and regular mainte-nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’sgood mechanical condition, as well as its emis-sions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure thatthe scheduled maintenance, as well as generalmaintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one whocan ensure that your vehicle receives propermaintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optionalscheduled maintenance items are described andlisted in your “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide”. You must refer to that guide to ensurethat necessary maintenance is performed on yourNISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items whichshould be checked during normal day-to-day op-eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-eration. It is your responsibility to perform thesemaintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requiresminimal mechanical skill and only a few generalautomotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSANdealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicleappears to malfunction, have the systemschecked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialistswho are kept up-to-date with the latest serviceinformation through technical bulletins, servicetips, and in-dealership training programs. Theyare completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-hicles before they work on your vehicle, ratherthan after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’sservice department performs the best job to meetthe maintenance requirements on your vehicle —in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of thevehicle, general maintenance should be per-formed regularly as prescribed in this section. Ifyou detect any unusual sounds, vibrations orsmells, be sure to check for the cause or have aNISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, youshould notify a NISSAN dealer if you think thatrepairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenancework, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “ * ” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should beperformed from time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doorsand engine hood operate properly. Also ensurethat all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.Make sure that the secondary latch keeps thehood from opening when the primary latch isreleased.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

When driving in areas using road salt or othercorrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are alloperating properly and installed securely. Alsocheck headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checkingthe tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten ifnecessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge oftenand always prior to long distance trips. If neces-sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including thespare, to the pressure specified. Check carefullyfor damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)transmitter components Replace the TPMStransmitter grommet seal, valve core and capwhen the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicleshould pull to either side while driving on astraight and level road, or if you detect uneven orabnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.

● For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) inthe Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regularbasis. Check the windshield at least every sixmonths for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-aged windshield repaired by a qualified repairfacility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks orwear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked on a regular basis, such as when per-forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-hicle, etc.

Additional information on the followingitems with an “*” is found later in this sec-tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smoothoperation and make sure the pedal does not bindor require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat awayfrom the pedal.

Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or thevehicle seems to take longer to stop, see aNISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mataway from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull thevehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)P (Park) position mechanism On a fairlysteep hill, check that the vehicle is held securelywith the shift selector in the P (Park) positionwithout applying any brakes.

Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely heldon a fairly steep hill with only the parking brakeapplied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,see a NISSAN dealer.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seatadjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure theyoperate smoothly and all latches lock securely inevery position. Check that the head restraints orheadrests move up and down smoothly and thelocks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latchedpositions.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat beltsystem (for example, buckles, anchors, adjustersand retractors) operate properly and smoothly,and are installed securely. Check the belt web-bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hardsteering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure allwarning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properly and thatthe wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properly and insufficient quantity when operating the heater orair conditioner (if so equipped).

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically (for example, each time youcheck the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. Itshould be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-hicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure thatthe brake and clutch fluid level is between theMIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant levelwhen the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive beltsare not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parkingthe vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drainback into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loosesupports, cracks or holes. If the sound of theexhaust seems unusual or there is a smell ofexhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaustsystem inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See thecarbon monoxide warning in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. Water dripping from theair conditioner (if so equipped) after use is nor-mal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasolinefumes are evident, check for the cause and haveit corrected immediately.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure thehoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or looseconnections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-posed to corrosive substances such as thoseused on icy roads or to control dust. It is veryimportant to remove these substances from theunderbody, otherwise rust may form on the floorpan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At theend of winter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, in those areaswhere mud and dirt may have accumulated. Seethe “Appearance and care” section of thismanual.

Windshield-washer fluid* Check that there isadequate fluid in the reservoir.


When performing any inspection or maintenancework on your vehicle, always take care to preventserious accidental injury to yourself or damage tothe vehicle. The following are general precau-tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-ply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the vehiclefrom moving. For manual transmissionmodels, move the shift selector to N(Neutral). For CVT models, move theshift selector to P (Park).

● Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFFor LOCK position when performing anyparts replacement or repairs.

● If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans, beltsand any other moving parts.

● It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jewelry,such as rings, watches, etc. beforeworking on your vehicle.

● Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

● If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, be surethere is proper ventilation for exhaustgases to escape.

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, supportit with safety stands.

● Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank andbattery.

● On gasoline engine models, the fuelfilter or fuel lines should be serviced bya NISSAN dealer because the fuel linesare under high pressure even when theengine is off.

CAUTION

● Do not work under the hood while theengine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

● Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engineoil, engine coolant and/or other vehiclefluids can damage the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulations fordisposal of vehicle fluid.

● Never leave the engine or the CVT re-lated component harness connectordisconnected while the ignition switchis in the ON position.

● Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized component whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic engine cooling fan. It may comeon at any time without warning, even ifthe ignition key is in the OFF positionand the engine is not running. To avoidinjury, always disconnect the negativebattery cable before working near thefan.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectiongives instructions regarding only those itemswhich are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-der information” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improperservicing may result in operating difficulties orexcessive emissions, and could affect warrantycoverage. If in doubt about any servicing,have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS


MR20DE engine

1. Engine coolant reservoir2. Engine oil filler cap3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (M/T model)4. Battery5. Air cleaner6. Fuse/Fusible link box7. Radiator cap8. Engine oil dipstick9. Drive belt location10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI0709

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS


QR25DE engine

1. Engine coolant reservoir2. Engine oil filler cap3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (M/T model)4. Battery5. Air cleaner6. Fuse/Fusible link box7. Radiator cap8. Engine oil dipstick9. Drive belt location10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir* Engine cover removed for clarity.

WDI0637


The engine cooling system is filled at the factorywith a pre-diluted mixture of 50% GenuineNISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and50% water to provide year-round anti-freeze andcoolant protection. The antifreeze solution con-tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional en-gine cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING

● Never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiator cooldown. Serious burns could be causedby high pressure fluid escaping fromthe radiator. See precautions in “If yourvehicle overheats” found in the “In caseof emergency” section of this manual.

● The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, use only a genuineNISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

● When adding or replacing coolant, besure to use only Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) orequivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-dilutedto provide antifreeze protection to -34°F (-37° C). If additional freeze protec-tion is needed due to weather whereyou operate your vehicle, add GenuineNISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant(blue) concentrate following the direc-tions on the container. If an equivalentcoolant other than Genuine NISSANLong Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) isused, follow the coolant manufacturer’sinstructions to maintain minimum anti-freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). Theuse of other types of coolant solutionsother than Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalentmay damage the engine coolingsystem.

● The life expectancy of the factory-fillcoolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or7 years. Mixing any other type of cool-ant other than Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ-ing Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (green), or the useof non-distilled water will reduce thelife expectancy of the factory-fill cool-ant. Refer to the Nissan Service andMaintenance Guide for more details.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM


CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir whenthe engine is cold. If the coolant level is belowthe MIN level �B , add coolant to the MAX level�A . If the reservoir is empty, check the coolantlevel in the radiator when the engine is cold. Ifthere is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill theradiator with coolant up to the filler opening andalso add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level �A .

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy ofthe factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000

km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant orthe use of non-distilled water will reduce the lifeexpectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to theNISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide formore details.

If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked by a NISSANdealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANTA NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.The service procedure can be found in theNISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine overheat-ing.

WARNING

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never change the coolant when the en-gine is hot.

● Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escapingfrom the radiator.

● Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.Check your local regulations.

MR20DELDI0537

QR25DELDI0589


CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oillevel. It should be between the H (High) andL (Low) marks �B . This is the normal oper-ating oil level range. If the oil level is belowthe L (Low) mark �A , remove the oil filler capand pour recommended oil through theopening. Do not overfill �C .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the severityof operating conditions.

MR20DEWDI0591

QR25DELDI0590 LDI0371

ENGINE OIL


CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-erating the engine with an insufficientamount of oil can damage the engine, andsuch damage is not covered by warranty.

Make sure to follow the engine oil changing inter-vals in the maintenance booklet. Operating underthe following conditions may require more fre-quent oil change:

● repeated short distance driving

● driving in dusty conditions

● stop and go commuting.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap �A by turning itcounterclockwise.

MR20DE engine

�A Oil filler cap

�B Oil drain plug

�C Oil filter

WDI0521

QR25DE engine

�A Oil filler cap

�B Oil drain plug

�C Oil filter

WDI0597


4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug�B .

5. Remove the drain plug �B with a wrench byturning it counterclockwise and completelydrain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove andreplace it at this time. See “Changing engineoil filter” later in this section.

● Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

● Check your local regulations.

WARNING

● Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin cancer.

● Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a newwasher. Securely tighten the drain plug witha wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil throughthe oil filler opening, then install the oil fillercap securely.

See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual fordrain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on theoil temperature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Always usethe dipstick to determine when the properamount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage aroundthe drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.Add engine oil if necessary.

MR20DE engine

�A Oil filler cap

�B Oil drain plug

�C Oil filter

WDI0521


CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter �C .

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrenchby turning it counterclockwise. Then removethe oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface witha clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket materialremaining on the sealing surface of theengine. Failure to do so could lead toengine damage.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with cleanengine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistanceis felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil ifnecessary.

CAUTION

● Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT FluidNS-2. Do not mix with other fluids.

● Using transmission fluid other thanGenuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 willdamage the CVT, which is not coveredby the warranty.

When checking or replacement of CVT fluid isrequired, we recommend your NISSAN dealer forservicing.

QR25DE engine

�A Oil filler cap

�B Oil drain plug

�C Oil filter

WDI0597

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLETRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID


For further brake and clutch fluid specificationinformation, refer to “Capacities and recom-mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior or contaminatedfluid may damage the brake and clutch(if so equipped) systems. The use ofimproper fluids can damage the brakeand clutch system and affect the vehi-cle’s stopping ability.

● Clean the filler cap before removing.

● Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous andshould be stored carefully in markedcontainers out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid isspilled, immediately wash the surfacewith water.

BRAKE FLUIDCheck the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If thebrake warning light comes on, add GenuineNISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line �A . Iffluid must be added frequently, the system shouldbe checked by a NISSAN dealer.

CLUTCH FLUID (if so equipped)Check the clutch fluid level in the reservoir(manual transmissions only). Add GenuineNISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line �A . Iffluid must be added frequently, the system shouldbe checked by a NISSAN dealer.

LDI0539 LDI0539

BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped)FLUID


WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIR

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the lowwindshield-washer fluid warning light comes on(if so equipped).

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, liftthe cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for bettercleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when drivingconditions require an increased amount ofwindshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

● Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for windshield-washer fluid.This may result in damage to the paint.

● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluidreservoir with washer fluid concen-trates at full strength. Some methyl al-cohol based washer fluid concentratesmay permanently stain the grille ifspilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the windshield-washer fluid reser-voir. Do not use the windshield-washerfluid reservoir to mix the washer fluidconcentrate and water.

● Keep the battery surface clean and dry.Clean the battery with a solution of bakingsoda and water.

● Make certain the terminal connections areclean and securely tightened.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days orlonger, disconnect the negative (-) batteryterminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

● Do not expose the battery to flames, anelectrical spark or a cigarette. Hydro-gen gas generated by the battery is ex-plosive. Explosive gases can causeblindness or injury. Do not allow batteryfluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabricsor painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid cancause blindness or injury. After touch-ing a battery or battery cap, do nottouch or rub your eyes. Thoroughlywash your hands. If the acid contactsyour eyes, skin or clothing, immediatelyflush with water for at least 15 minutesand seek medical attention.

LDI0540

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID BATTERY


● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid inthe battery is low. Low battery fluid cancause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce bat-tery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

● When working on or near a battery, al-ways wear suitable eye protection andremove all jewelry.

● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● Do not tip the battery. Keep the ventcaps tight and the battery level.

1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver asshown. Use a cloth to protect the batterycase.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it isnecessary to add fluid, add only distilledwater to bring the level up to the bottom ofthe filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstallthe vent caps.

WDI0224

WDI0529


Vehicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”in the “In case of emergency” section of thismanual. If the engine does not start by jumpstarting, the battery may have to be replaced.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

1. Automatic tensioner2. Generator3. Water pump4. Air conditioner compressor (with A/C)

or Idler pulley (without A/C)5. Crankshaft pulley

1. Crankshaft pulley2. Idler Pulley3. Automatic tensioner4. Water pump5. Generator6. Air conditioner compressor

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF orLOCK position before servicing drive belt.The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

MR20DE modelWDI0638

QR25DE modelWDI0696

DRIVE BELT


1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusualwear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is in poorcondition, have it replaced or adjusted by aNISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-tion.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Iridium-tipped spark plugs (if soequipped)

It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped �Aspark plugs as frequently as conventional typespark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSANService and Maintenance Guide”. Do not serviceiridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap-ping.

● Always replace spark plugs with rec-ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch areoff and that the parking brake is engagedsecurely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-move the spark plugs. An incorrect socketcan damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, see your NISSANdealer for assistance.

SDI1895

SPARK PLUGS


The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned andreused. Replace it according to the maintenancelog shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-nance Guide.”

To remove the air cleaner filter:

1. Unlatch the clips and move the air cleanercover upward.

2. Remove the air cleaner filter.

● For the MR20DE, release the 2 retainingclips �A and pull the unit upward.

● For the QR25DE, push the tabs �A andpull the unit upward �B .

3. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter hous-ing and the cover with a damp cloth.

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner, makesure the air cleaner cover is seated in thehousing and latch the clips.

WARNING

● Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you or oth-ers to be burned. The air cleaner notonly cleans the air, it stops the flame ifthe engine backfires. If it isn’t there, andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with the air cleanerremoved, and be careful when workingon the engine with the air cleanerremoved.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body orattempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could resultin serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTERThe in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-borne dust and pollen particles and reducessome objectionable outside odors. The filter islocated behind the trim panel near the accelera-tor pedal. Refer to the “NISSAN Service andMaintenance Guide” for change intervals.

If replacement is required, see your NISSANdealer.

MR20DELDI0710

QR25DEWDI0596

AIR CLEANER


CLEANINGIf your windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer or if a wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax or other material may be onthe blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washerfluid or a mild detergent. Your windshield is cleanif beads do not form when rinsing with clearwater.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soakedin a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinsethe blades with clear water. If your windshield isstill not clear after cleaning the blades and usingthe wiper, install new windshield wiper blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-age the windshield and impair drivervision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

�2 Push the release tab, then move the wiperblade down the wiper arm to remove.

�3 Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiperarm until it clicks into place.

5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in thegroove.

CAUTION

● After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position;otherwise it may be damaged when thehood is opened.

● Make sure the wiper blades contact theglass; otherwise the arms may be dam-aged from wind pressure.

WDI0408

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES


If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful notto let wax get into the washer nozzle �A . This maycause clogging or improper windshield-washeroperation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove itwith a needle or small pin �B .

If the brakes do not operate properly, have thebrakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjustevery time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake systemcheck if the brake pedal height does notreturn to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audiblewear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is inmotion. The noise will be heard whether or not thebrake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise maybe heard. Occasional brake noise during light tomoderate stops is normal and does not affect thefunction or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For more information regardingbrake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

WDI0337

BRAKES


Two types of fuses are used. Type �A is used inthe fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type�B is used in the passenger compartment fusebox.

Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. Theyare stored in the passenger compartment fusebox.

Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-partment and passenger compartment fuseboxes.

If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,the type A fuse will not be level with the fusepocket as shown in the illustration. This will notaffect the performance of the fuse. Make sure thefuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in theunderhood fuse boxes.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

LDI0455 LDI0457MR20DE engine

LDI0542

FUSES


NOTE:

For checking and replacing fuses onQR25DE engine models, see a NISSANdealer.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing thetabs �A and lifting the cover up from thefront �B .

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. Thefuse puller is located in the center of the fuseblock in the passenger compartment.

5. If the fuse is open �A , replace it with a newfuse �B .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

Fusible linksIf any electrical equipment does not operate andthe fuses are in good condition, check the fusiblelinks in the holders �A , �B and �C on MR20DEmodels or in holder �A on QR25DE models. Ifany of these fusible links are melted, replace onlywith genuine NISSAN parts.

For checking and replacing the fusible links inholders �A and �B and �C , see a NISSAN dealer.

WDI0452

MR20DELDI0546


PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the storage bin �A .

3. Pull the storage bin upward and out to re-move �B . A fuse guide is on the storage bin.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller �C . Thefuse puller is located in the center of the fuseblock.

5. If the fuse is open, replace it with an equiva-lent good fuse.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

7. Install the storage bin.

QR25DELDI0593 WDI0569


CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallowthe battery or removed parts.

KEYFOB (if so equipped)

Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

�1 Open the lid using a coin �A .

�2 Remove the battery �B .

�3 Install a new battery �C with the “+” facingdown.

● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding thebattery across the contact points will seri-ously deplete the storage capacity.

LDI0484

BATTERY REPLACEMENT


● Do not touch the internal circuit and electricterminals as it could cause a malfunction.

● When changing the battery, do not let dustor oil get on the keyfob.

● There is danger of explosion if a lithium bat-tery is incorrectly replaced. Replace onlywith the same or equivalent type.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.

�4 Close the lid securely.

5. Press the button, then thebutton two or three times to check the key-fob operation.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 5.

● An improperly disposed battery canhurt the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

● The keyfob is water-resistant; how-ever, if it does get wet, immediatelywipe completely dry.

● The operational range of the keyfobextends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)from the vehicle. This range may varywith conditions.

FCC Notice:Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation of the device.

SDI1867


NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if soequipped)Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-lows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-gent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver �A into the slit �Bof the corner and twist it to separate theupper part from the lower part. Use a cloth toprotect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-lent.

● Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-tric terminals as doing so could cause amalfunction.

● Hold the battery by the edges. Holdingthe battery across the contact points willseriously deplete the storage capacity.

● Make sure that the + side faces the bot-tom of the case.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated �C �D .

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance forreplacement.

FCC Notice:Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation of the device.

WDI0535


HEADLIGHTSReplacing the halogen headlight bulbThe headlight is a semi-sealed beam type whichuses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-cause the headlight assembly must be removedfrom the vehicle for bulb replacement, see yourNISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

● Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment isnecessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

● Do not leave the headlight assemblyopen without a bulb installed for a longperiod of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,etc. entering the headlight body mayaffect bulb performance. Remove thebulb from the headlight assembly justbefore a replacement bulb is installed.

● Only touch the base when handling thebulb. Never touch the glass envelope.Touching the glass could significantlyaffect bulb life and/or headlightperformance.

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● Use the same number and wattage asshown in the chart.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of theexterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. Atemperature difference between the inside andthe outside of the lens causes the fog. This is nota malfunction. If large drops of water collectinside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

LIGHTS


EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

Headlight assemblyLow/High (Halogen) 60/55 H13Turn/Park 28/8 3457AKSide marker 3.8 194

Front fog light* (if so equipped) 55 H11LLFront map lights* (if so equipped) 5 168Interior light 8 AL57Trunk light 3.4 158High-mounted stop light*

Inside (if so equipped) 18 921LFSpoiler (if so equipped) — LED

Rear combination lightTurn signal light 27/7 3057KStop/Tail 27/7 3057KBackup (reversing) 18 921Rear side marker 3.8 194

License plate light* 5 W5W

* Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.


1. Front map lights (if so equipped)2. Interior light3. Headlight assembly4. Front fog light (if so equipped)5. High-mounted stop light (if so

equipped)6. Spoiler-mounted stop light (if so

equipped)7. License plate light8. Rear combination light

Indicates bulb removalIndicates bulb replacement

Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D. Whenreplacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.WDI0599

WDI0257


Use a cloth �1 to protect the interior light hous-ing.

Use a cloth �A to protect the light housing.

If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the“In case of emergency” section of thismanual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) (if so equipped)

This vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Itmonitors tire pressure of all tires exceptthe spare. When the low tire pressurewarning light is lit, one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (forexample a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-sure warning light” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section, “Tire Pressure Monitor-ing System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “Incase of emergency” section.

Interior lightWDI0206

Map light (if so equipped)LDI0711

WHEELS AND TIRES


Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including thespare) often and always prior to long dis-tance trips. The recommended tire pres-sure specifications are shown on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification labelor the Tire and Loading Information labelunder the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.The Tire and Loading Information label isaffixed to the driver side center pillar. Tirepressures should be checked regularlybecause:

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.

● Tires can lose air suddenly whendriven over potholes or other objectsor if the vehicle strikes a curb whileparking.

The tire pressures should be checkedwhen the tires are cold. The tires areconsidered COLD after the vehicle hasbeen parked for 3 or more hours, or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderatespeeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-der inflation, may adversely affecttire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

● Improperly inflated tires can failsuddenly and cause an accident.

● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-tion label. The vehicle weight ca-pacity is indicated on the Tire andLoading Information label. Donot load your vehicle beyond thiscapacity. Overloading your ve-hicle may result in reduced tirelife, unsafe operating conditionsdue to premature tire failure, orunfavorable handling character-istics and could also lead to aserious accident. Loading be-yond the specified capacity mayalso result in failure of other ve-hicle components.

● Before taking a long trip, orwhenever you heavily load yourvehicle, use a tire pressure gaugeto ensure that the tire pressuresare at the specified level.

● For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.


Tire and loading information label

�1 Seating capacity: The maximum num-ber of occupants that can be seatedin the vehicle.

�2 Vehicle load limit: See “Vehicle load-ing information” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section.

�3 Original tire size: The size of the tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle atthe factory.

�4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires tothis pressure when the tires are cold.Tires are considered COLD after thevehicle has been parked for 3 or morehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km) at moderate speeds. The recom-mended cold tire inflation is set by themanufacturer to provide the best bal-ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,driveability, tire noise, etc., up to thevehicle’s GVWR.

�5 Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” laterin this section.

�6 Spare tire size.

LDI0545


Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from thetire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarelyonto the valve stem. Do not press toohard or force the valve stem side-ways, or air will escape. If the hissingsound of air escaping from the tire isheard while checking the pressure,reposition the gauge to eliminate thisleakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gaugestem and compare to the specifica-tion shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If toomuch air is added, press the core ofthe valve stem briefly with the tip ofthe gauge stem to release pressure.Recheck the pressure and add orrelease air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,including the spare.

Size Cold Tire InflationPressure

Front Original Tire:P205/60R15P205/55R16

230 kPa, 33 PSI

P225/45R17 240 kPa, 35 PSIRear Original Tire:P205/60R15P205/55R16

230 kPa, 33 PSI

P225/45R17 240 kPa, 35 PSISpare Tire:T125/70D16 420 kPa, 60 PSILDI0393


TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers toplace standardized information on thesidewall of all tires. This information iden-tifies and describes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and also pro-vides the tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. The TINcan be used to identify the tire in case of arecall.

�1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles (not alltires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-ber gives the width in millimeters ofthe tire from sidewall edge to side-wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,known as the aspect ratio, gives thetire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.5. Two-digit number (15): This number

is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support. You may notfind this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should notdrive the vehicle faster than the tirespeed rating.

ExampleWDI0394

ExampleWDI0395


�2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for anew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-ment Of Transportation”. The symbolcan be placed above, below or to theleft or right of the Tire IdentificationNumber.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code(Optional).

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-ture.

6. Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. For ex-ample, the numbers 3103 means the31st week of 2003. If these numbersare missing, then look on the othersidewall of the tire.

�3 Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-ers also must indicate the materials in thetire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,and others.

�4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-sure

This number is the greatest amount of airpressure that should be put in the tire. Donot exceed the maximum permissible in-flation pressure.

�5 Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum loadin kilograms and pounds that can be car-ried by the tire. When replacing the tireson the vehicle, always use a tire that hasthe same load rating as the factory in-stalled tire.

�6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

ExampleWDI0396


�7 The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire hasradial structure.

�8 Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that aredefined throughout this section, IntendedOutboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall thatcontains a whitewall, bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on theother sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-ward facing sidewall of an asymmetricaltire that has a particular side that mustalways face outward when mounted on avehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

● When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) andconstruction. A NISSAN dealer may beable to help you with information abouttire type, size, speed rating andavailability.

● Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factory equippedtires, and may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-els to provide good performance all year, includ-ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Seasontires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&Son the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than All Season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some modelsto provide superior performance on dry roads.Summer tire performance is substantially re-duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not havethe tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, NISSAN recommends the use ofSNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all fourwheels.

Snow tiresIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary to selecttires equivalent in size and load rating to theoriginal equipment tires. If you do not, it canadversely affect the safety and handling of yourvehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratingsthan factory equipped tires and may not matchthe potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the samesize, brand, construction and tread pattern on allfour wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tiresmay be used. However, some U.S. states andCanadian provinces prohibit their use. Checklocal, state and provincial laws before installing


studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities ofstudded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Tire chains/cables should not be installedon P225/45R17 size tires. Installation ofthe tire chains/cables on P225/45R17 sizetires will cause damage to the vehicle. Ifyou plan to use tire chains/cables, youshould install P205/55R16 size tires onyour vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according tolocation. Check the local laws before installingtire chains. When installing tire chains, make surethey are the proper size for the tires on yourvehicle and are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAEclass “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used onvehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-signed to meet the minimum clearances betweenthe tire and the closest vehicle suspension orbody component required to accommodate theuse of a winter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are determinedusing the factory equipped tires. Other types maydamage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when

recommended by the tire chain manufacturer toensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chainmust be secured or removed to prevent the pos-sibility of whipping action damage to the fendersor underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading yourvehicle when using tire chains. In addition, driveat a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle maybe damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor-mance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on thefront wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving withchains in such conditions can cause damage tothe various mechanisms of the vehicle due tosome overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tiresevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual for tire re-placing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten thewheel nuts to the specified torquewith a torque wrench.

WDI0258


Wheel nut tightening torque:83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-ened to specifications at all times. Itis recommended that wheel nuts betightened to specification at eachtire rotation interval.

WARNING

● After rotating the tires, check andadjust the tire pressure.

● Retighten the wheel nuts whenthe vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).

● Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.


1. Wear indicator2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

● Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking, bulg-ing or objects caught in the tread.If excessive wear, cracks, bulgingor deep cuts are found, the tire(s)should be replaced.

● The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. When thewear indicators are visible, thetire(s) should be replaced.

● Tires degrade with age and use.Have tires, including the spare,over 6 years old checked by aqualified technician becausesome tire damage may not be ob-vious. Replace the tires as neces-sary to prevent tire failure andpossible personal injury.

● Improper service of the spare tiremay result in serious personal in-jury. If it is necessary to repair thespare tire, contact a NISSANdealer.


WDI0259


Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, treaddesign, speed rating and load carrying capacityas originally equipped. Recommended types andsizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

WARNING

● The use of tires other than those recom-mended or the mixed use of tires ofdifferent brands, construction (bias,bias-belted or radial), or tread patternscan adversely affect the ride, braking,handling, VDC system (if so equipped),ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-ance, tire chain clearance, speedom-eter calibration, headlight aim andbumper height. Some of these effectsmay lead to accidents and could resultin serious personal injury.

● If your vehicle was originally equippedwith 4 tires that were the same size andyou are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires ,install the new tires on the rear axle.Placing new tires on the front axle maycause loss of vehicle control in somedriving conditions and cause an acci-dent and personal injury.

● If the wheels are changed for any rea-son, always replace with wheels whichhave the same off-set dimension.Wheels of a different off-set couldcause premature tire wear, degrade ve-hicle handling characteristics, affectthe VDC system (if so equipped) and/orinterference with the brakediscs/drums. Such interference canlead to decreased braking efficiencyand/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re-fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni-cal and consumer information” sectionof this manual for wheel off-setdimensions.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, the TPMS (if so equipped)will not function and the low tire pres-sure warning light will flash for approxi-mately 1 minute. The light will remainon after 1 minute. Contact your NISSANdealer as soon as possible for tire re-placement and/or system resetting.

● Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by NISSAN could affect theproper operation of the TPMS (if soequipped).

● Do not install a damaged or deformedwheel or tire even if it has been re-paired. Such wheels or tires could havestructural damage and could fail with-out warning.

● The use of retread tires is notrecommended.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Wheel balanceUnbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handlingand tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can getout of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-formation Booklet.


Care of wheels

● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicleto maintain their appearance.

● Clean the inner side of the wheels when thewheel is changed or the underside of thevehicle is washed.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washingthe wheels.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause loss ofpressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

● NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt in areaswhere it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire)

Observe the following precautions if the TEM-PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged orinvolved in an accident:

WARNING

● The spare tire should be used for emer-gency use only. It should be replacedwith the standard tire at the first oppor-tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-tial damage.

● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoidsharp turns and abrupt braking whiledriving.

● Periodically check spare tire inflationpressure. Always keep the pressure ofthe TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tireat 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY sparetire installed do not drive the vehicle atspeeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire should be used on therear wheels and the original tire usedon the front wheels (drive wheels). Usetire chains only on the front (original)tires.

● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire will wear at a faster ratethan the standard tire. Replace thespare tire as soon as the tread wearindicators appear.

● Do not use the spare tire on othervehicles.

● Do not use more than one spare tire atthe same time.

● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chainswill not fit properly and may cause dam-age to the vehicle.

● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire is smaller than the originaltire, ground clearance is reduced. Toavoid damage to the vehicle, do notdrive over obstacles. Also, do not drivethe vehicle through an automatic carwash since it may get caught.


MEMO


9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Air conditioner system (if so equipped)refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification number(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Air conditioner specification label(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-26Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-27

In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and LubricantsUS measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 14-1/2 gal 12-1/8 gal 55.0 See “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.Engine oil *7

Drain and RefillWith oil filter change MR20DE 4-1/8 qt 3-3/8 qt 3.9

• Engine oil with API Certification Mark *1• Viscosity SAE 5W-30

QR25DE 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt 4.3Without oil filterchange

MR20DE 3-7/8 qt 3-1/8 qt 3.6QR25DE 4-1/4 qt 3-1/2 qt 4.0

Cooling systemWith reservoir

MR20DE 1-7/8 gal 1-1/2 gal 7.0Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)or equivalentQR25DE

CVT 1-7/8 gal 1-5/8 gal 7.1M/T 1-7/8 gal 1-1/2 gal 6.9

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 *2Manual transmission gear oil

MR20DE — — — Genuine NISSAN gear oil (Chevron Texaco ETL8997B) 75W-80or equivalent *3

QR25DE — — — Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi75W-85 or equivalent *4

Brake and clutch fluid Refill to the proper level according to the instructions inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section *8

Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalentDOT 3 *5

Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a) *6Air conditioning system oil — — — Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *6Windshield-washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & An-

tifreeze or equivalent*1: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section.*2: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by

the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.*3: If Genuine NISSAN gear oil is not available, API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-80 may be used as a temporary replacement. However, use Genuine NISSAN gear oil as soon as it is available.*4: If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 is not available, API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 may be used as a temporary replacement. However, use

Genuine NISSAN gear oil as soon as it is available.*5: Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.*6: For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.*7: For further details, see “Engine oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.*8: See a NISSAN dealer for service.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

MR20DE and QR25DE engine except Spec-V

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

QR25DE engine Spec-V only

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octanerating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,unleaded regular gasoline with an octane ratingof at lease 87 AKI (Research octane number 91)can be used, but only under the following precau-tions:

● have the fuel tank filled only partially withunleaded regular gasoline, and fill up withunleaded premium as soon as possible.

● avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accel-eration.

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso-line is recommended.

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meetsthe World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-cations where it is available. Many of the automo-bile manufacturers developed this specificationto improve emission control system and vehicleperformance. Ask your service station manager ifthe gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-lated gasolines. These gasolines are speciallydesigned to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN

supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-gests that you use reformulated gasoline whenavailable.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanolwith or without advertising their presence.NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels ofwhich the oxygenate content and the fuel com-patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-termined. If in doubt, ask your service stationmanager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please takethe following precautions as the usage of suchfuels may cause vehicle performance problemsand/or fuel system damage.

● The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

● If an oxygenate-blend other thanmethanol blend is used, it should con-tain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

Technical and consumer information 9-3

● If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitable amountof appropriate cosolvents and corro-sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-lated with appropriate cosolvents andcorrosion inhibitors, such methanolblends may cause fuel system damageand/or vehicle performance problems.At this time, sufficient data is not avail-able to ensure that all methanol blendsare suitable for use in NISSAN ve-hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced afterusing oxygenate-blend fuels, immediatelychange to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with alow blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cancause paint damage.

E–85 fuelE-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuelethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 canonly be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Donot use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. governmentregulations require fuel ethanol dispensingpumps to be identified by a small, square, orange

and black label with the common abbreviation orthe appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of anyaftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve depositremovers, etc.) which are sold commercially.Many of these additives intended for gum, varnishor deposit removal may contain active solvents orsimilar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuelsystem and engine.

Octane rating tipsUsing unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended can causepersistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Sparkknock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-vere, this can lead to engine damage. If youdetect a persistent heavy spark knock evenwhen using gasoline of the stated octanerating, or if you hear steady spark knockwhile holding a steady speed on levelroads, have a NISSAN dealer correct thecondition. Failure to correct the conditionis misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSANis not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in sparkknock, after-run and/or overheating, which maycause excessive fuel consumption or engine

damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-countered, have your vehicle checked at aNISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is not acause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.

CAUTION

● Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehiclenot specifically designed for E-85 fuelcan damage fuel system componentsand is not covered by the NISSAN newvehicle limited warranty.

● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%fuel ethanol and 15% unleadedgasoline.

● U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-fied by a small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbrevia-tion or the appropriate percentage forthat region.


ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, qualityand viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactoryengine life and performance. See “Capacitiesand recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in thissection. NISSAN recommends the use of anenergy conserving oil in order to improve fueleconomy.

Select only engine oils that meet the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-tion mark on the front of the container. Oils whichdo not have the specified quality label should notbe used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-sary when the proper oil type is used and main-tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has beenpreviously used should not be used.

Oil viscosityThe engine oil viscosity or thickness changeswith temperature. Because of this, it is importantto select the engine oil viscosity based on thetemperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oilviscosity other than that recommended couldcause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filterYour new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described in “Changeintervals.”

Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filtersthat are not of the specified quality, or exceedingrecommended oil and filter change intervalscould reduce engine life. Damage to the enginecaused by improper maintenance or use of incor-rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-ranty.

WTI0183


Your engine was filled with a high-quality engineoil when it was built. You do not have to changethe oil before the first recommended changeinterval. Oil and filter change intervals dependupon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions mayrequire more frequent oil and filter changes:

● repeated short distance driving at cold out-side temperatures

● driving in dusty conditions

● extensive idling

● towing a trailer

● stop and go commuting

Refer to the “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM (if soequipped) REFRIGERANT AND OILRECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSANvehicle must be charged with the refriger-ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSANA/C system oil Type S or the exact equiva-lents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil willcause severe damage to the air condition-ing system and will require the replace-ment of all air conditioner systemcomponents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourNISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozonelayer. Although this refrigerant does not affect theearth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-tions require the recovery and recycling of anyrefrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trainedtechnicians and equipment needed to recoverand recycle your air conditioner system refriger-ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your airconditioner system.


ENGINE

Model MR20DE QR25DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHCCylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline 4-cylinder, inlineBore x Stroke in (mm) 3.307 x 3.547 (84.0 x 90.1) 3.5 x 3.9 (89.0 x 100.0)Displacement cu in (cm3) 121.86 (1,997) 151.82 (2,488)Firing order 1–3–4–2 1–3–4–2

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.

M/TCVT (in “N” position)Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idlespeed)CO % at idle

Spark plugPLZKAR6A-11 (all except California models)

FXE20HR-11 (California models)DILKAR6A-11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chainThis spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS


WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel type Size Offset in (mm)

Steel 15 x 6.5JJ 1.77 (45)

Aluminum and steel 16 x 6.5JJ 1.77 (45)

Aluminum 17 x 7.0JJ 1.97 (50)

Tire size P205/60R15P205/55R16P225/45VR17P225/45WR17

Spare tire T125/70D16

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Unit: in (mm)Model MR20DE QR25DE

Overalllength

179.6 (4,563) 180.1 (4,575)

Overallwidth

70.5 (1,790) 70.5 (1,790)

Overallheight 59.7 (1,516)

59.1 (1,501)(M/T), 59.5

(1,511) (CVT)Front Track

15 X 6.5 and 16 X 6.5inch wheel

59.8 (1,520) N/A

17 X 7.0 inch wheel N/A 59.5 (1,510)Rear Track

15 X 6.5 and 16 X 6.5inch wheel

60.8 (1,544) N/A

17 X 7.0 inch wheel N/A 60.4 (1,534)Wheelbase 105.7 (2,685) 105.7 (2,685)

Gross ve-hicle weightrating

lb (kg)

See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel” on the center pillar between the driv-er’s side front and rear doors.

Gross axleweight rat-ing

Front lb (kg)Rear lb (kg)


When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-hicle in another country, you should first findout if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too lowmay cause engine damage. All gasoline vehiclesmust be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas whereappropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, provinceor district, it may be necessary to modify thevehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-sion control and safety standards vary accordingto the country, state, province or district; there-fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, transpor-tation, and registration are the responsibil-ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsiblefor any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATEThe vehicle identification number (VIN) plate isattached as shown. This number is the identifica-tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicleregistration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(chassis number)The vehicle identification number is located asshown.

STI0457 STI0465

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGYOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHERCOUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION


F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.CERTIFICATION LABELThe Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-able vehicle information, such as: Gross VehicleWeight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Reviewit carefully.

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe number is stamped on the engine as shown.

STI0349

MR20DESTI0466

QR25DEWTI0096


EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABELThe emission control information label is at-tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABELThe cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. The label is located asshown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABEL (if so equipped)The air conditioner specification label is affixed asshown.

WTI0188 WTI0174 WTI0198


Use the following steps to mount the front licenseplate:

�1 Slide the metal mounting clips onto the li-cense plate holder as indicated.

�2 Make holes on the plastic finisher at thelocation mark (small dimple) using a 0.31 in(8 mm) drill. Apply light pressure to the drill.Install the license plate holder using the twoscrews provided with the holder.

�3 Mount the license plate using two M6-14mm bolts.

License plate bolt tightening torque:3.8 - 4.7 ft-lb (5.10 - 6.37 N·m)

WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area inside a vehicle. Ina collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself withthe following terms before loading yourvehicle:

● Curb Weight (actual weight of yourvehicle) - vehicle weight including:standard and optional equipment, flu-ids, emergency tools, and spare tireassembly. This weight does not in-clude passengers and cargo.

WTI0187

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION


● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weight ofpassengers and cargo.

● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) - maximum total combinedweight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch, trailertongue load and any other optionalequipment. This information is lo-cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limit specifiedfor the front or rear axle. This informa-tion is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● GCWR (Gross Combined Weightrating) - The maximum total weightrating of the vehicle, passengers,cargo, and trailer.

● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,Total load capacity - maximum totalweight limit specified of the load(passengers and cargo) for the ve-hicle. This is the maximum combinedweight of occupants and cargo thatcan be loaded into the vehicle. If thevehicle is used to tow a trailer, thetrailer tongue weight must be in-cluded as part of the cargo load. Thisinformation is located on the Tire andLoading Information label (if soequipped).

● Cargo capacity - permissible weightof cargo, the subtracted weight ofoccupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-hicle shown as “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo” on the Tire andLoading Information label. Do not exceedthe number of occupants shown as“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-ing Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-pants and cargo”, add the weight of alloccupants, then add the total luggageweight. Examples are shown in the follow-ing illustration.


Steps for determining correct loadlimit

1. Locate the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXXlbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if theXXX amount equals 1400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =300 kg.)

ExampleLTI0152


5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargo andluggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.See “Measurement of weights” later inthis section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label.

LOADING TIPS

● The GVW must not exceed GVWRor GAWR as specified on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● Do not load the front and rear axle tothe GAWR. Doing so will exceed theGVWR.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

● Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rear GAWRs.If you do, parts of your vehiclecan break, tire damage could oc-cur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could resultin loss of control and cause per-sonal injury.

● Overloading not only can shortenthe life of your vehicle and thetire, but can also cause unsafevehicle handling and longer brak-ing distances. This may cause apremature tire failure whichcould result in a serious accidentand personal injury. Failurescaused by overloading are notcovered by the vehicle’swarranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weightshifts that could affect the balance of yourvehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, driveto a scale and weigh the front and the rearwheels separately to determine axleloads. Individual axle loads should not ex-ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loadsshould not exceed the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR). These ratings aregiven on the vehicle certification label. Ifweight ratings are exceeded, move or re-move items to bring all weights below theratings.


WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of atrailer and its cargo can adversely affectvehicle handling, braking and perfor-mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy loadfor the first 500 miles (800 km). Yourengine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine and otherparts of your vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-marily to carry passengers and cargo. Rememberthat towing a trailer places additional loads onyour vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-ing and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is availableon the website at www.nissanusa.com. Thisguide includes information on trailer towing ca-pability and the special equipment required forproper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITSMaximum trailer loadsNever allow the total trailer load to exceed thevalue specified in the “TowingLoad/Specification” chart found later in this sec-tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weightplus its cargo weight.

● When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs.(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem must be used.

The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle(including passengers and cargo) plus the totaltrailer load. Towing loads greater than these orusing improper towing equipment could ad-versely affect vehicle handling, braking and per-formance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is notonly related to the maximum trailer loads, but alsothe places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-priate for level highway driving may have to bereduced for low traction situations (for example,on slippery boat ramps).

LTI0164

TOWING A TRAILER


Temperature conditions can also affect towing.For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outsidetemperatures on graded roads can affect engineperformance and cause overheating. The engineprotection mode, which helps reduce the chanceof engine damage, could activate and automati-cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed maydecrease under high load. Plan your trip carefullyto account for trailer and vehicle load, weatherand road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced enginepower and vehicle speed. The reducedspeed may be lower than other traffic,which could increase the chance of a col-lision. Be especially careful when driving.If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-ing speed, pull to the side of the road in asafe area. Allow the engine to cool andreturn to normal operation. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from impropertowing procedures is not covered byNISSAN warranties.

Tongue loadKeep the tongue load between 10 - 15 percent ofthe total trailer load or use the trailer tongue loadspecified by the trailer manufacturer. The tongueload must be within the maximum tongue loadlimits shown in the following “TowingLoad/Specification” chart. If the tongue load be-comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow forproper tongue load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight(GVW)/Maximum Gross Axle Weight(GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceedthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel. The GVW equals the combined weight ofthe unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optionalequipment. In addition, front or rear GAW mustnot exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

WTI0160 TI1012M


Towing capacities are calculated assuming abase vehicle with driver and any options requiredto achieve the rating. Additional passengers,cargo and/or optional equipment, such as thetrailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle andreduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacityand trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed toconfirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, FrontGAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined WeightRating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measuredusing platform type scales commonly found attruck stops, highway weigh stations, buildingsupply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity fortongue load, use the following procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all ofthe passengers and cargo that are normallyin the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from theGVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-able maximum tongue load.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weighyour trailer on a scale with all equipment andcargo, that are normally in the trailer when it istowed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is notmore than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shownon the trailer and is not more than the calculatedavailable maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale tomake sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and RearGross Axle Weight are not more than FrontGross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weighton the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need tobe moved or removed to meet the specified rat-ings.

Example:

● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighedon a scale - including passengers, cargo andhitch - 3,820 lb. (1732 kg).

● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) fromF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -3,920 lb. (1778 kg).

● Maximum Towing Load from “TowingLoad/Specification� chart - 1,000 lb. (454kg).

3,920 lb. (1778 kg) GVWR

– 3,820 lb. (1732 kg) GVW

= 100 lb. (45 kg) Available for tongueweight

1,000 lb. (454 kg) Capacity available fortowing

100 lb. (45 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 1,000 lb. (454 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less thanthe maximum towing capacity due to the passen-ger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within thetrailer tongue load specification recommendedby the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue loadbecomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed themaximum tongue weight specification shown inthe “Towing load/specification” chart even if thecalculated available tongue weight is greaterthan 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is lessthan 10% , reduce the total trailer weight tomatch the available tongue weight.


Always verify that available capacities are withinthe required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION

UNIT: lb (kg)

MAXIMUM TOWINGLOAD *1

1,000 (454)

MAXIMUM TONGUELOAD

100 (45)

*1: The towing capacity values are calculatedassuming a base vehicle with driver and anyoptions required to achieve the rating. Additionalpassengers, cargo and/or optional equipmentwill add weight to the vehicle and reduce yourvehicle’s maximum towing capacity.

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached tothe vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or prop-erty damage due to sway caused by crosswinds,rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specificweight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-pable of towing a trailer heavier than theweight rating of the hitch components.Never exceed the weight rating of thehitch components. Doing so can causeserious personal injury or propertydamage.

Hitch ballChoose a hitch ball of the proper size and weightrating for your trailer:

● The required hitch ball size is stamped onmost trailer couplers. Most hitch balls alsohave the size printed on the top of the ball.

● Choose the proper class hitch ball based onthe trailer weight.

● The diameter of the threaded shank of thehitch ball must be matched to the ball mounthole diameter. The hitch ball shank shouldbe no more than 1/16” smaller than the holein the ball mount.

● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must belong enough to be properly secured to theball mount. There should be at least 2threads showing beyond the lock washerand nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount andthe ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.Choose a proper class ball mount based on thetrailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount shouldbe chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with theground.

Sway control device

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffetingcaused by other vehicles can affect trailer handling.Sway control devices may be used to help controlthese affects. If you choose to use one, contact areputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure thesway control device will work with the vehicle,hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system. Followthe instructions provided by the manufacturer forinstalling and using the sway control device.

Class I hitchClass I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).

You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment thathas a 2,000 lb (909 kg) maximum weight rating tothe vehicle, but your vehicle is only capable oftowing the maximum trailer weights shown in theTowing Load/Specification chart earlier in thissection.


CAUTION

● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

● The hitch should not be attached to oraffect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-tem, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.

● To reduce the possibility of additionaldamage if your vehicle is struck fromthe rear, where practical, remove thereceiver when not in use.

● After the hitch is removed, seal the boltholes to prevent exhaust fumes, wateror dust from entering the passengercompartment.

● Regularly check that all trailer hitchmounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures

● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-hicle tires to the recommended coldtire pressure indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

● Trailer tire condition, size, load ratingand proper inflation pressure shouldbe in accordance with the trailer andtire manufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chainsAlways use suitable safety chains between yourvehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should becrossed and should be attached to the hitch, not tothe vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enoughslack in the chains to permit turning corners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electricalsystem, a commercially available power-type module/converter must be used toprovide power for all trailer lighting. Thisunit uses the vehicle battery as a directpower source for all trailer lights while us-ing the vehicle tail light, stoplight and turnsignal circuits as a signal source. Themodule/converter must draw no more that15 milliamps from the stop and tail lampcircuits. Using a module/converter that ex-ceeds these power requirements may dam-age the vehicle’s electrical system. See areputable trailer dealer to obtain the properequipment and to have it installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/orlocal regulations. For assistance in hooking uptrailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-table trailer dealer.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,make sure it conforms to federal and/or localregulations and that it is properly installed.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

● Be certain your vehicle maintains a levelposition when a loaded and/or unloadedtrailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if ithas an abnormal nose-up or nose-downcondition; check for improper tongue load,overload, worn suspension or other possiblecauses of either condition.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Keep the cargo load as low as possible inthe trailer to keep the trailer center of gravitylow.


● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of thetrailer load is in the front half and 40% is inthe back half. Also make sure the load isbalanced side to side.

● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, andtrailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach atrailer to the vehicle.

● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform toall federal, state or local regulations. If not,install any mirrors required for towing beforedriving the vehicle.

● Determine the overall height of the vehicleand trailer so the required clearance isknown.

Trailer towing tipsIn order to gain skill and an understanding of thevehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,stopping and backing up in an area which is freefrom traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-mance will be somewhat different than undernormal driving conditions.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin orlock to prevent the coupler from inadvert-ently becoming unlatched.

● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

● Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

● When backing up, hold the bottom of thesteering wheel with one hand. Move yourhand in the direction in which you want thetrailer to go. Make small corrections andback up slowly. If possible, have someoneguide you when you are backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle andtrailer when parking. Parking on a slope is notrecommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector to the P(Park) position before blocking thewheels and applying the parking brake,transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhillside of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowlyrelease the brake pedal until the blocks ab-sorb the vehicle load.


5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.


3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer areclear from the blocks.


7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

● While going downhill, the weight of thetrailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de-crease overall stability. Therefore, to main-tain adequate control, reduce your speedand shift to a lower gear. Avoid long orrepeated use of the brakes when descend-ing a hill, as this reduces their effectivenessand could cause overheating. Shifting to alower gear instead provides “engine brak-ing” and reduces the need to brake as fre-quently.


● If the engine coolant temperature rises to ahigh temperature, refer to “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “In case of emergency”section of this owner’s manual.

● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalcircumstances.

● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first500 miles (805 km).

● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you dotow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● Have your vehicle serviced more often thanat intervals specified in the recommendedMaintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

● When making a turn, your trailer wheels willbe closer to the inside of the turn than yourvehicle wheels. To compensate for this,make a larger than normal turning radiusduring the turn.

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adverselyaffect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-ing vehicle sway. When being passed bylarger vehicles, be prepared for possiblechanges in crosswinds that could affect ve-hicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal toallow the vehicle to coast and steer asstraight ahead as the road conditions allow.This combination will help stabilize the ve-hicle.

– Do not correct trailer sway by steering orapplying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply thebrakes and pull to the side of the road in asafe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-anced as described earlier in this section.

● Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requires con-siderably more distance than normal pass-ing. Remember, the length of the trailer mustalso pass the other vehicle before you cansafely change lanes.

● Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans-mission to a lower gear for engine brakingwhen driving down steep or long hills. Thiswill help slow the vehicle without applyingthe brakes.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too longor too frequently. This could cause thebrakes to overheat, resulting in reducedbraking efficiency.

● Increase your following distance to allow forgreater stopping distances while towing atrailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

● NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-trol (if so equipped) not be used while tow-ing a trailer.

● Some states or provinces have specificregulations and speed limits for vehicles thatare towing trailers. Obey the local speedlimits.

● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

● When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe orrear bumper.

● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lightsbefore backing the trailer into the water orthe trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, transmission fluidshould be changed more frequently. Foradditional information, see the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section earlier inthis manual.


FLAT TOWINGTowing your vehicle with all four wheels on theground is sometimes called flat towing. Thismethod is sometimes used when towing a vehiclebehind a recreational vehicle, such as a motorhome.

CAUTION

● Failure to follow these guidelines canresult in severe transmission damage.

● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-ways tow forward, never backward.

● DO NOT tow any continuously variabletransmission vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground (flat towing). Do-ing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmis-sion parts due to lack of transmissionlubrication.

● For emergency towing procedures referto “Towing recommended by NISSAN”in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

Manual Transmission (if so equipped)● Always tow with the manual transmission in

Neutral.

● After towing 500 miles (805 km), start andidle the engine with the transmission in Neu-tral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engineafter every 500 miles (805 km) of towingmay cause damage to internal transmissionparts.

Continuously Variable Transmission (ifso equipped)To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuouslyvariable transmission, an appropriate vehicledolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’sdrive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufac-turer’s recommendations when using their prod-uct.

DOT (Department of Transportation) QualityGrades: All passenger car tires must conform tofederal safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) timesas well on the government course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, however,and may depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-sured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING


WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat, and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of thetire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-mance which all passenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-tablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-ther separately or in combination, cancause heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the followingemission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with othervehicle warranties in your Warranty InformationBooklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.If you did not receive a Warranty InformationBooklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-ment by writing to:

● Nissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with othervehicle warranties in your Warranty InformationBooklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.If you did not receive a Warranty InformationBooklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-ment by writing to:

● Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMWARRANTY


For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problems be-tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.You can also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting ourConsumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform Transport Canada in additionto notifying NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives complaints,it may open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may request that NISSAN con-duct a recall campaign. However, Trans-port Canada cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s De-fect Investigations and Recalls Divisiontoll free at 1-800-333-0510. You mayalso report safety defects online at:https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

Additional information concerning motorvehicle safety may be obtained fromTransport Canada’s Road Safety Informa-tion Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or onlineat www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

To notify NISSAN of any safety concernsplease contact our Consumer InformationCentre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS


Due to legal requirements in some states andCanadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ofthe emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when itis driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,the ready condition can be obtained by ordinaryusage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or thebattery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset toa “not ready” condition. Before taking the I/M test,check the vehicle’s inspection/maintenance testreadiness condition. Place the ignition switch in theON position without starting the engine. If theMalfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steadyfor 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , theI/M test condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does notblink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is“ready”. Contact a NISSAN dealer to set the “readycondition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting aroad obstacle, data that will assist in understand-ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDRis designed to record data related to vehicledynamics and safety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in thisvehicle is designed to record such data as:

● How various systems in your vehicle wereoperating;

● Whether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastened;

● How far (if at all) the driver was depressingthe accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

● How fast the vehicle was traveling.

● Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understand-ing of the circumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded byyour vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situationoccurs; no data are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and no personal data(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine the EDR data with

the type of personally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-ment is required and access to the vehicle or theEDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have the special equip-ment, can read the information if they have ac-cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will onlybe accessed with the consent of the vehicleowner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-mitted by law.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)


A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information for yourvehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrationsand step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-cedures, this manual is the same one used by thefactory-trained technicians working at NISSANdealerships. Also available are genuine NISSANOwner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Serviceand Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 modelyear and later contact:

1-800-450-9491www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 modelyear and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

1-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model yearand prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contactyour nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your areacall the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-tive will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service andOwner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISIONUnfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikelyevent, there is some important information youshould know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorizethe use of non-genuine collision parts in order tocut costs, among other reasons.

Insist on the use of genuine NISSANcollision parts!If you want your vehicle to be restored using partsmade to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-tions – if you want to help it to last and hold itsresale value, the solution is simple. Tell yourinsurance agent and your repair shop toonly use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damagecaused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protectyour personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-tection and maintain the resale value of yourvehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, usingGenuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-necessary excess wear and tear expenses at theend of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones tominimize the risk that the hood will penetrate thewindshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide suchbuilt-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?In over 40 states, the law says you must beadvised if non-genuine parts are used to repairyour vehicle. And some states have enacted lawsthat restrict insurance companies from authoriz-ing the use of non-genuine collision parts duringthe new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-tect you, so you can take action to protect your-self.

It’s your right!If you should need further information visit us at:www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) orwww.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION


MEMO


10 IndexA

Air bag (See supplemental restraintsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impactair bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-48Side and curtain (See supplementalside air bag and curtain side-impactair bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-56Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-56, 2-14Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . .4-18Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-23Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11Air conditioner system refrigerant andoil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6Heater and air conditioner controls . . . .4-14Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-23

Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19Alarm system(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-17Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . . . .2-10Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-24Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23

Compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . .4-34, 4-37, 4-43, 4-48FM/AM radio with compact disc(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32, 4-35FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39, 4-45

Audio SystemiPod� Player. . . . . . . . . .4-55, 4-56, 4-58

Audio systemRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-61USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51, 4-53

AutomaticAutomatic power window switch . . . . .2-35

Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6AUX jack . . . . . . . . . .4-34, 4-38, 4-44, 4-50

B

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Block heater

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Bluetooth� hands-free phone system . . . . .4-63Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-24Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-29Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-16, 8-21Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-19Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . . . .4-8Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-10Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29

C

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63Cargo net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60CD player(See audio system) . . . .4-34, 4-37, 4-43, 4-48Child restraints . . . . . . .1-21, 1-21, 1-22, 1-24

Precautions on childrestraints . . . . . . . .1-22, 1-28, 1-33, 1-37Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-26

Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . .3-7Chimes, audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . .2-16Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . .7-2Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33, 4-36, 4-41Clutch

Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Compact disc(CD) player . . . . . . . . .4-34, 4-37, 4-43, 4-48Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . .5-12

Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Driving with Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Transmission shift selector lock release . .5-16

Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . . .4-8Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5

ControlsAudio controls (steering wheel). . . . . . .4-61Heater and air conditioner controls. . . . .4-14

CoolantCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-9Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Curtain side-impact air bag system(See supplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag system). . . . . . . . . . .1-53

D

Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-22

Defroster switchRear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-23Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-2Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4, 3-5Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Driving with Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Driving with manual transmission . . . . . .5-17Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-11Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-24Engine

Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-10Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-13Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-9Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-10Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-6Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-11Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . .5-2Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28

F

Flashers(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . . . .2-24Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6Fluid

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10

F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . .9-10Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3, 1-4, 1-5Front air bag system(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . .1-48Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

10-2

FuelCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-25Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . . . .3-25Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . .2-5, 3-25

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23

G

Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . .2-7Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6g-force gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2g-force gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

H

Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth� . . . . .4-63Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-24Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-21Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Heater

Heater and air conditioner controls. . . . .4-14Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17

Hood release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

I

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . .2-18, 3-4, 5-10Important vehicle information label . . . . . . .9-10In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Indicator lights and audible reminders(See warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . .2-23Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-23Intelligent Key system

Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Remote keyless entry operation. . . . . . .3-17Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24iPod� Player . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55, 4-56, 4-58ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8

K

Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-25Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system(See Intelligent Key system). . . . . . . . .3-17

Keys, Except Intelligent Key. . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10Emission control information label . . . . .9-11Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . .9-10Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-11Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-56

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24License plate

Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . . .9-12

10-3

LightAir bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-56, 2-14Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-29Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-10Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-21Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-21Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-50Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . .2-40Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9

LightsMap lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40

LockChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4, 3-5Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . . . .3-25Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . .3-24

Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 3-25Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . .2-12Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-13Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12

M

MaintenanceGeneral maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-20Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4

Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-23Mirror

Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37

N

NISSAN Intelligent Key™. . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-11NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18, 3-4, 5-10

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . . . . .9-4Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

OilCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-13Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-10Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5

Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-11Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Owner’s manual/service manual orderinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

P

ParkingParking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Phone, Bluetooth� hands-free system . . . . .4-63Power

Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35

PrecautionsMaintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5Precautions on childrestraints. . . . . . . . .1-22, 1-28, 1-33, 1-37Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-11

10-4

Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

Programmable features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-63FM/AM radio with compact disc(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32, 4-35FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39, 4-45Steering wheel audio control switch . . . .4-61

Readiness for inspection maintenance(I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3, 1-4, 1-5Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8Recorders

Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . . .9-6Registering your vehicle in another country . . .9-9Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . .9-25

S

SafetyChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7Child seat belts . . . . .1-22, 1-28, 1-33, 1-37

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . .9-25Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2Seat belt

Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-21Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-11Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-20Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-19Three-point type with retractor . . . . . . .1-14

Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Seats

Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-2Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3, 1-4, 1-5

Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem), engine start . . . . . . . .2-18, 3-4, 5-10Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5Shift lock release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Shifting

Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-19Side air bag system (See supplementalside air bag and curtain side-impactair bag system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . . .2-40SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-56Starting

Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-10Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

SteeringPower steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27

Steering wheel audio control switch . . . . . .4-61Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . .1-56Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-56, 2-14Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-48Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels . . . . . . .1-56Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41

Supplemental restraint system(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-41

10-5

Supplemental side and curtain side-impactair bag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53Switch

Automatic power window switch . . . . . .2-35Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-24Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-21Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-21Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) offswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-20

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18, 3-4, 5-10Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 8-41Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-11Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38Tire placard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . .9-23Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8

Tire pressureLow tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-3Towing

Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . .9-19Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16

TransmissionContinuously Variable Transmission(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Driving with Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Driving with manual transmission . . . . . .5-17Shift selector lock release. . . . . . . . . .5-16

Travel (See registering your vehicle in anothercountry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Trunk access through the rear seat . . . . .1-4, 1-5Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23

U

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . .9-23USB interface

Audio file operation . . . . . . . . . .4-51, 4-53

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . .9-8Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-25Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system. . . . .5-26Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN)(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle immobi-lizer system), engine start . . . . . .2-18, 3-4, 5-10Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27

W

WarningAir bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-56, 2-14Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-10Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-11Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-11Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-24Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-50Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

10-6

Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-56Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Washer switch

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-20Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . .9-8Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8When traveling or registering your vehiclein another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Windows

Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-35Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-20Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Wiper

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-20Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

10-7

RECOMMENDED FUEL:

MR20DE and QR25DE engine except Spec-V

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

QR25DE engine Spec-V only

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octanerating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,unleaded regular gasoline with an octane ratingof at lease 87 AKI (Research octane number 91)can be used, but only under the following precau-tions:

● have the fuel tank filled only partially withunleaded regular gasoline, and fill up withunleaded premium as soon as possible.

● avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accel-eration.

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso-line is recommended.

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technicaland consumer information” section.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:● Engine oil with API Certification Mark

● Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” inthe “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:See Tire and Loading Information label.

The label is typically located on the driver sidecenter pillar or on the driver’s door. For additionalinformation, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicleuse, follow the recommendations outlined in the“Break-in schedule” information found in the“Starting and driving” section of this manual. Fol-low these recommendations for the future reli-ability and economy of your new vehicle. Failureto follow these recommendations may result invehicle damage or shortened engine life.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

®

2011 SENTRAOWNER’S MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2011 N

ISS

AN

SE

NTR

AB

16

-D

Printing : July 2010

Publication No.: OM1E 0B16U0

Printed in U.S.A. B16-D

Automotive

2011 SENTRA OWNER'S MANUAL